JP2017176547A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of pass a large number of game balls through a predetermined passage area at one time without using exclusive driving means.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a game board having a game area where game balls roll; a big winning hole 540 through which a game ball can pass; a shutter 610 that can be displaced between an open state where a game ball can easily pass through the big winning hole 540 and a closed state where a game ball cannot easily pass through the big winning hole; a big winning hole solenoid for driving the shutter 610; and a guide path that can guide a game ball to the big winning hole 540. The guide path includes: a first guide path 531 having a deceleration rib 534 that can decelerate the moving speed of a game ball; a second guide path 532 for guiding a game ball to the upstream of the first guide path 531; and a third guide path for guiding a game ball to the downstream of the first guide path 531. The third guide path is arranged at a position where a game ball that moves along the first guide path 531 and a game ball that moves along the second guide path may collide with each other.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 51

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines or pachislot machines, a technique for passing a large number of game balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area is known. For example, as described in Patent Document 1.

  In the technique described in Patent Literature 1, a game ball container is provided that can store a plurality of game balls that have dropped on the game board and that can release the storage. In such a configuration, when the storage is released in a state where a plurality of game balls are stored in the game ball container, the game ball container moves the stored plurality of game balls into a predetermined passing region by the operation. Can be passed through. That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, a large number of game balls can be passed through a predetermined passing area at a time.

JP 2004-313481 A

  In the conventional pachinko machine described above, the game ball container is provided with a dedicated driving means and is operated by the driving means, which causes a high cost.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of passing a large number of game balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area without providing a dedicated driving means. With the goal.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board having a gaming area in which a gaming ball rolls, a passing area provided in the gaming board, through which the gaming ball can pass, and the passing of the gaming ball to the passing area. A displacement member that can be displaced into an easy first aspect and a second aspect in which it is difficult for a game ball to pass, a drive means that drives the displacement member, and a guide path that can guide the game ball to the passage area The guide path includes a first guide path having a speed reduction unit capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball, and a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the upstream side of the first guide path. And a third guiding path for guiding a game ball downstream of the first guiding path, wherein the third guiding path is a gaming ball that has moved along the first guiding path, and It is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where the game ball that has moved on the third taxiway can collide.

  In addition, the second guiding path and the third guiding path are game balls that have moved along the second guiding path and the third guiding path when the displacement member is in the first mode. Is arranged at a position where it can flow into the passage region.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to pass a large number of game balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area without providing dedicated driving means.

The perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, an exploded perspective view showing the appearance. Similarly, the front view which shows the external appearance of a game board. Similarly, the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. Similarly, a block diagram showing a main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (B) A table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. (C) A table showing per-assignment. (D) A table showing the types of hits. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the flow of a game. 8 is a flowchart showing the continuation of FIG. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main control circuit. The flowchart which similarly shows the system timer interruption process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol control process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation time management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process performed with the main control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening process which is executed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the hit end interval process performed with the main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process performed with a main control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the main process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with a sub control circuit. Similarly, the flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed with a sub control circuit. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. The front perspective view which shows a normal electric accessory unit. The front exploded perspective view which shows a normal electric accessory unit. The front view of the base member of a normal electric accessory unit. The front perspective view of the base member of a normal electric accessory unit. Front sectional drawing of a normal electric accessory unit. The front cross-sectional perspective view of a normal electric accessory unit. The front perspective view which shows an attacker unit. The front view which shows an attacker unit. The side view which shows an attacker unit. The top view which shows an attacker unit. The front exploded perspective view which shows an attacker unit. The front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. The rear view which shows the front side board part of an attacker unit. Front sectional drawing which shows an attacker unit. The front cross-sectional perspective view of an attacker unit. (A) The top view which shows a big prize opening solenoid. (B) The top view which shows a link arm. (C) The top view which shows a shutter. (A) The top view which shows an attacker unit in case a shutter is a 2nd position. (B) The top view which similarly shows a special electric accessory. (A) The top view which shows an attacker unit in case a shutter is a 1st position. (B) The top view which similarly shows a special electric accessory. (A) The plane schematic diagram which showed a mode that the game ball rolled on the 1st taxiway of an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing the continuation of FIG. (C) Similarly, a schematic plan view showing how a plurality of game balls roll. Front sectional drawing which shows the mutual positional relationship of a normal electric accessory and an attacker unit. The partial front view which shows the game ball which rolls a game area | region. (A) Front sectional drawing which shows a mode that a game ball rolls through a normal electric accessory unit. (B) Similarly, front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. The partial front view which shows the game ball which rolls a game area | region. (A) Front sectional drawing which shows a mode that a game ball rolls through an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. (A) Front sectional drawing which shows a mode that a game ball rolls through an attacker unit. (B) Similarly, front sectional view showing the continuation of FIG. (A) The plane schematic diagram which showed a mode that the game ball rolled on the 1st guide path of the attacker unit which concerns on another example. (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. (A) A schematic plan view showing a continuation of FIG. (B) Similarly, a schematic side view. The front view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body (except a base member) from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The front view which shows the state which removed the 1st movable body from the 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The top view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear perspective view which shows a 2nd movable accessory unit. The rear view which shows a 1st movable body (except a base member). The front disassembled perspective view which shows the movable body of a 1st movable body. The rear view which shows the movement control means of a 1st movable body. The rear view which showed a mode that a movable body was moved to a production | presentation position from a standby position. The rear view which shows the 1st movable body (except a base member) in the state which has a movable body in an effect position. The front disassembled perspective view which shows a 2nd movable body. The front view which shows a movement control means. The front view which showed a mode that the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body were moved to a production | presentation position from a standby position. The front view which showed the state which has a 1st movable body (only base member) and a 2nd movable body in a production | presentation position. The front view which showed the state which has a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body in an effect position. The rear view which showed the state which has a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body in an effect position. The top view which showed the state which has a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body in an effect position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state which has a 1st movable body in a standby position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state which has a 1st movable body in the highest position. The front schematic diagram which showed the mode of the arm in the state which has a 1st movable body in an effect position. The front view which showed the inside (a base member and a board | substrate) of the 2nd movable body. The enlarged front view which showed the connector and flat cable of the 2nd movable body. The disassembled perspective sectional view which showed the butting | matching part of a 2nd movable body (SS cross section of FIG. 75). Similarly, side surface sectional drawing (SS cross section of FIG. 75). Side surface sectional drawing which showed the detailed shape of the butt | matching part of a 2nd movable body. (A) The top view which shows the structure of a flat cable. (B) Similarly, a side view. (C) Similarly, a bottom view. The front view which showed the state in which the flat cable was connected normally. The front view which showed the state in which the flat cable is not connected normally. (A) Side surface sectional drawing which showed the 1st modification of the butting | matching part of a 2nd movable body. (B) Side surface sectional drawing which similarly showed the 2nd modification. (C) Side surface sectional drawing which similarly showed the 3rd modification. The front view which showed the inside (a base member and a board | substrate) of a movable body. The rear view which showed the board | substrate of the movable body, the connector, and the flat cable. The rear view which showed the base member to which the board | substrate was attached. The rear view which showed the modification of the 2nd movable body. The perspective view which showed the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on 1st embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left view of a reel sheet. The right view which showed the base member and the reel sheet | seat. A1-A1 sectional drawing. The right front disassembled perspective view which showed the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on a modification. Similarly, the right view which showed the base member, the reel sheet | seat, and the left side attachment member. B1-B1 sectional drawing. The perspective view which showed the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on 2nd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left view of a reel sheet. The right view which showed the base member and the reel sheet | seat. A2-A2 sectional drawing. The right front disassembled perspective view which showed the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on a modification. Similarly, the right view which showed the base member, the reel sheet | seat, and the left side attachment member. B2-B2 sectional drawing. The perspective view which showed the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on 3rd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit. Similarly, front sectional view. Similarly, an exploded perspective view. The perspective view of a drum main body. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a left front exploded perspective view. The right view of a base member. The left view of a reel sheet. The right view which showed the base member, the reel sheet | seat, and the left side attachment member. A3-A3 sectional drawing. B3-B3 sectional drawing. (A) The right view which showed the overlapping part which is not pressed by the pressing part. (B) The right view which showed the state which the superimposition part deform | transformed. The right front perspective view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus. Similarly, a right front exploded perspective view. Similarly, a right rear exploded perspective view. The rear perspective view which showed the base member, the rotation distribution mechanism, the croon, and the guide member. The front disassembled perspective view which showed the guide member and the pressing member. The figure which showed the state by which game balls are distributed to a 2nd channel | path. The figure which showed the flow of the game ball distributed to the 2nd channel | path, the 3rd channel | path, and the 4th channel | path. The figure which showed the state by which game balls are distributed to a 1st channel | path. The front perspective view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus. The top view which showed the game ball distribution apparatus which concerns on another embodiment.

[Composition of gaming machine]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the following description, the front-rear direction is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left and right directions are defined with the left hand side as the left side and the right hand side as the right side.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate. A unit 19 is provided.

  The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the dispensing unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board 17 on the front side. To support.

  The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is disposed so as to face a game board 17 (described later) in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. In addition, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are disposed on the upper portion of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, production, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for performing, for example, notification with light or production.

  The dish unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper dish 26 and the lower dish 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

  The upper plate 26 is for storing a game ball to be launched into a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout outlet 61 and an effect button 62. The payout outlet 61 is for lending game balls and paying out (prize balls). The payout outlet 61 discharges the game ball when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button” or “push button”. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout outlet 63. The payout port 63 is for lending out game balls and paying out (prize balls) in the same manner as the payout port 63 of the upper plate 26. The payout outlet 63 discharges the game ball when the game ball overflows from the upper plate 26.

  The launching device 15 is for launching game balls stored in the upper plate 26 in the game area 20. The launching device 15 is disposed at the lower right front of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is disposed on the surface side of the panel body 31. The driving device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the launching device 15, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player, a game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in accordance with the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decoration symbol), a jackpot effect image, a demo effect image, the number of times the identification symbol change display is suspended, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged at the approximate center of the game board 17 (the inner periphery side of the stage 42 described later).

  The game board 17 is disposed in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a stage 42, a game ball sorting device 5400 (first start port 5442), an ordinary electric accessory unit 400 (second start port 440 and an ordinary electric accessory). 460), the passing gate 49, the attacker unit 500 (large winning opening 540 and special electric accessory 600), the general winning openings 53, 54 and 450, the out opening 55, the LED unit 70, the decorative member 56, and the movable accessory unit 57. It has.

  The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-like members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 41a” and “inner rail 41b”). The outer rail 41a mainly partitions (defines) the game area 20. The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. The inner rail 41b, together with the outer rail 41a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 41b is disposed inside the outer rail 41a on the left side of the game board 17.

  The stage 42 divides the flow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the right and left of the stage 42. The stage 42 is arranged on the upper part of the game area 20. The stage 42 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front. On the inner side (inner peripheral side) of the stage 42, the game board 17 is opened, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed.

  Note that the game ball launched by the launching device 15 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with the stage 42, the game nail 68 or the like driven into the game board 17. The discharged game balls are distributed to the flow-down area according to the operation amount of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side of the stage 42. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side of the stage 42. Note that the method of hitting the game ball down to the left side of the stage 42 is called “left-handed”, and the method of hitting the game ball down to the right side of the stage 42 is called “right-handed”.

  The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device that appropriately distributes game balls to the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444. The game ball sorting device 5400 is disposed at a substantially lower center of the game area 20.

The first start port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol, which will be described later. An opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74 is given. The first start port 5442 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the substrate unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Or, it is discharged (discharged) from the discharge outlet 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 is made by left-handed.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball sorting device 5400 will be given later.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20.

  The second start port 440 provides an opportunity for a hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a first special symbol display unit 73 and a second special symbol, which will be described later. An opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74 is given. The second start port 440 is provided with a second start port switch 441 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Or, it is discharged (discharged) from the discharge outlet 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The second starting port 440 is determined to be difficult to win by the ordinary electric accessory 460. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed.

  The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 461 that can be rotated in the left-right direction, and a start-up solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the blade member 461. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is disposed above the second start port 440. When the blade member 461 is driven by the start opening solenoid 462, the ordinary electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass easily. Configured. When the game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the ordinary electric accessory 460, the game ball is won at the second start port 440. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 461) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

  The passing gate 49 provides a trigger for normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed). The passing gate 49 is disposed at the center right portion of the game board 17 and above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 5). When a game ball passes through the pass gate 49, the passed game ball is detected by the pass gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). Note that the game ball is passed to the passing gate 49 by right-handed.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the special prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a lower right portion of the game area 20 and below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

  The big winning opening 540 is a part that can be opened in a hit game state (a big hit game state or a small hit game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the big winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

  The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can be moved back and forth in the front-rear direction, and a prize winning solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is disposed above the special prize opening 540. When the shutter 610 is driven by the special prize opening solenoid 620, the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the special prize opening 540, and to the special prize opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state in which winning of a game ball is impossible (or difficult). In the opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the winning game state (big hit gaming state or This is performed when the game is shifted to the small hit game state.

  The general winning ports 53 and 54 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board 17 in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the general winning opening 450 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The general winning opening 53/54/450 is provided with a general winning opening switch 53a / 54a / 451 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins the general winning opening 53/54/450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a / 54a / 451. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 451, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27) (discharge). )

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 have three award balls, the general winning ports 53, 54 and 450 have ten award balls, and the big winning port 540 has a prize ball. The number is set to 15 each. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 55 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game board 17. The out port 55 is finally introduced when the launched game ball does not win a winning (starting) port such as the first starting port 5442.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol display unit. A symbol hold display portion 75 and a second special symbol hold display portion 76 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination). The normal symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start changing display that alternately turns on and off when a predetermined change display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

  When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a win, the combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol hold display section 72 displays the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the normal symbols that are held (hereinafter referred to as “the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol fluctuation display”). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol hold display unit 72 displays the number of times the normal symbol fluctuating display is held by a combination of turning on / off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. When the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the normal symbol variation display is suspended four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 and the 2nd special symbol display part 74 display the result (judgment determination) result with respect to a special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of determination (winning determination).

  The 1st special symbol display part 73 comprises the display LED group 73a which consists of 8 LED. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the first start port 5442, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball at the first start port 5442 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays a variation display triggered by a winning of a game ball (start winning) at the second starting port 440, and displays a result of a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts variation display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is a win, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming state in which a game ball can win a prize winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as a winning gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit gaming states are provided as gaming states that shift from the normal gaming state.

  The first special symbol hold display section 75 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 indicate the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol being held (hereinafter referred to as “the special symbol variable display hold count”). To display. The first special symbol hold display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display section 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of times of special symbol change display hold by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b is the same as that of the display LEDs 72a and 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  The decoration member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17. The decoration member 56 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 at the upper part of the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape whose longitudinal direction is the left-right direction. On the surface side (player side) of the decorative member 56, a decoration imitating a logo (character), a character, a symbol, or the like is applied. The decorative member 56 is configured to emit light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

  The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body in which a movable accessory and a drive source, which will be described later, are integrated. The movable accessory unit 57 can enhance the interest of the player by performing a predetermined performance operation using the movable accessory. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory unit 57 includes a first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400) is arranged on the inner right side of the stage 42 in the upper right part of the game board 17.
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400) will be given later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is disposed at the upper part of the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56.
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be given later.

  The third movable accessory unit 83 is disposed on the right and left sides of the game board 17 and behind the stage 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) imitating a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to move. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be lit. Most of the hand accessory 86 is concealed behind the game board 17 and the stage 42 in a standby state as shown in FIG. Further, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (the state in which the effect is being performed), and is easily visible to the player.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing when a game ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

  When the game ball wins the first start port 5442, the first start port switch 5472 detects the winning game ball, and the first special symbol display unit 73 starts to display the variation of the first special symbol. Further, when a game ball is won at the first start opening 5442 during the variation display of the first special symbol, the game to the first start opening 5442 is stopped until the first special symbol during the variation display is stopped. Execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. Thereafter, when the first special symbol being displayed in a variable state is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started.

  When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the second special symbol display unit 74 starts the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball is won at the second start opening 440 during the variation display of the second special symbol, the game to the second start opening 440 is continued until the second special symbol during the variation display is stopped. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. Thereafter, when the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started.

  In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is displaying a special symbol variation display, the other display unit does not perform a special symbol variation display. . In the present embodiment, when execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, priority is given to the start winning at the second start port 440, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to an upper limit of 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display is eight times, which is the total number of suspensions of the special symbol variation display due to winning in the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440.

  In addition, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes on the liquid crystal display device 16 except in specific cases. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols from “1” to “8” are used as the numbers. In addition, the identification symbol variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed with the first or second special symbol being variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 being stopped and stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as presentation identification information.

  Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a win. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Moreover, the specific stop display mode in the case where the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed is set corresponding to the winning type. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to winning. Note that some of the winning types have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it is difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of the winning.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Below, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing information on special symbol games as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a first upper limit of four times are stored. There are provided a first special symbol start storage area (4) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as a start memory, and a second special symbol for the upper limit of four times. There are provided a second special symbol start storage area (4) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a start memory.

  The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when power is cut off.

  Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, A second special symbol hold display section 76, a start port solenoid 462 for driving the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a prize winning port solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. In addition, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a call device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451, and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. The main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing backup data in the event of a power interruption in accordance with the operation of the game hall manager.

  The main control circuit 100 is connected to a payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 that pays out game balls, a launch device 350 that fires game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation to the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

  Upon receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a lending ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out the game ball. Further, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the payout / launch control circuit 300 supplies power to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Supply and control to fire game balls.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may comprise so that a signal can be transmitted to the main control circuit 100 from the control circuit 200. FIG.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect corresponding to the progress of the game in accordance with a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, and the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage medium that can be read by a computer having control means. Any other embodiment may be used. For example, a storage medium such as a hard disk device, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage unit. Further, the program, the table, and the like may not be recorded in advance but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable / writable storage medium may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and image data as image signals. And a D / A converter or the like for conversion.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Note that the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating an identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can perform control to display an image related to the game on the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The sound control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control related to sound generated from the speaker 24. The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decorative lamp. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The accessory control circuit 207 controls the movable accessory unit 57 (first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83). Circuit. The accessory control circuit 207 stores a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to the movable accessory unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. It has a data ROM and the like.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of the movable accessory unit 57. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 6 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. FIG. 6B is a table showing the specifications of the normal symbol game. FIG. 6C is a table showing the hit distribution. FIG. 6D is a table showing the hit types. Note that the data in the tables shown in FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored as a table in the main ROM 102.

  In the special symbol game, the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a low probability state is simply referred to as a low probability state (or a normal state or an uncertain change state). In a special symbol game, a gaming state in which a big hit determination is performed in a high probability state is simply referred to as a high probability state (or probability variation state). Thus, when the gaming state becomes a probable change state, a state more advantageous than the normal state is given to the player.

  In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the normal electric accessory 460 is released (ordinary hit game) for a relatively long time. In this way, in a normal symbol game, a game state in which normal symbol determination is performed with a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened for a relatively long time is referred to as an electric support state. In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than that in the case of not being in the electric support state. As described above, a state in which the current state is the electric support state and is performed in a short time per normal symbol determination is referred to as a time reduction state. Note that the high probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be able to shift when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. Moreover, the high probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time reduction state ends.

  In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a gaming state other than the short-time state. As described above, a gaming state in which normal symbol determination is not performed (a gaming state other than the short-time state) is referred to as a normal state (or a non-short-time state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the short-time state, a state more advantageous than the non-short-time state is given to the player. The time reduction state is continued until a hit determination (a big hit determination and a small hit determination) is performed a predetermined number of times after the transition from the normal state, for example, in a special symbol game.

  As described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state in the special symbol game, and a gaming state in which the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

  First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) will be a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot probability) In any case of the start winning of the start port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random numbers). In addition, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability variation state) is 1/100 (200 random numbers) in common in any of the start winnings of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). Further, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a win by the start winning of the second start port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random numbers). Is set. Note that the small hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 is not performed. In other words, the probability that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the second start port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the game ball winning at the first start port 5442. It is set higher than the probability.

  In addition, the ST number is set to 100 times in common regardless of whether the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is a big win due to the start winning. Note that ST (special time) is a probability variation state that ends according to the number of times (number-of-times cut type). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, “times” indicates the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after shifting to the probability variation state.

  Note that the ST number is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a super-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, when the super-probability change state is entered, 0 is displayed as the initial value. Each time the hit determination is repeated once (the determination result is lost), a state in which a numerical value is incremented by 1 is displayed. Then, when the numerical value of the ST number reaches 100, the super-probability change state is ended. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. Thus, when the initial value of the ST count is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

  In addition, the number of winning balls for winning at the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of winning balls for winning at the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of winning balls for winning at the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450 is The number of winning balls for 10 winning prizes to the big winning opening 540 is set to 15 respectively. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big hit game is set to 10 counts. In addition, the maximum winning count per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the normal symbol game is set to 10 counts. Further, regardless of the start winning of either the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440, the number of jackpot symbols is set to 100 in common. Further, the number of small winning symbols in the case of starting winning a prize at the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

  Next, the specifications of the normal symbol game will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in a low probability state. In addition, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state is set to 100/100 is set. When the result of the normal symbol determination is a win, the second start port 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6C, the big hit and the small hit distribution will be described.

  As shown in FIG.6 (c), the big hit by the start winning of the 1st start port 5442 is distributed into six types of big hit contents (big hit type). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is distributed to 15R probability change, substantially 10R probability change, substantially 5R probability change, 15R normal, substantially 10R normal, and substantially 5R normal. The contents of these jackpots are set so as to correspond to special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as a jackpot by the start winning of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -1. Further, a special 10R probability change is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -2. Further, a special 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (1) big hit -4. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -5, substantially 10R normal is set. Further, in response to the special figure (1) big hit -6, a substantial 5R normal is set.

  Further, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is distributed into six types of jackpot contents (jacket types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the second start port 440 is distributed to 15R probability change, real appearance small amount change, special probability change, 15R normal, real appearance small normal, special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as the jackpot by the start winning of the second starting port 440, respectively.

  Specifically, the 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -1. In addition, a substantial variation of the ball appearance is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -2. In addition, special probability variation is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -3. Moreover, 15R normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -4. Further, a special normal amount of balls is set corresponding to the special figure (2) big hit -5. Also, special normal is set corresponding to special figure (2) big hit -6.

  The small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, the small hits are divided into two times (1) and two times (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 as the small hits, respectively. Specifically, two times of opening (1) is set corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit -1. Further, in response to the special figure (2) small hit -2, the opening twice (2) is set.

  Here, the “number” column (notation) shown in the table of FIG. 6C shows the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, as described above, since the number of jackpot symbols due to the start winning of the first start port 5442 is 100, the special figure (1) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the first start port 5442. Probability (expected value) for each distribution is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, when the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6 is a jackpot due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probability (expected value) to be assigned is 25%, 15%, 10%, It is set to be 25%, 15%, 10%. Similarly, the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2 are set so that the probability (expected value) to be allocated is 98% and 2%, respectively, when the small hits are small hits.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), special figure (1) big hit -1 to 6, special figure (2) big hit -1 to 6, and special figure (2) small hit -1 and 2, A short time is set after each winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is completed. The number of time reductions given after the winning game ends is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

  Here, the notation “HH” shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a short-time state. The notation “HL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a probable variation state and that the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. The notation “LH” indicates that the special symbol game is in an uncertain change state and the normal symbol game is in a short time state. The notation “LL” indicates that the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state. Furthermore, the notation “between high probabilities” indicates that a special symbol game is given a high probability state, that is, a maximum of 100 time reductions.

  In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state (in the case of “LL”), the special symbol (1) big hit -1 or 6 big hit , 50 times are assigned. On the other hand, for example, in the case of “LL” as well, if the special figure (1) big hit -2 to 5 big hits, the time reduction number is not given. That is, when the special symbol game is in a non-probable change state and the normal symbol game is in a non-time-short state, if it is a big hit by the start winning of the first start port 5442, 35% (special figure (1) big hit- The number of time reductions is given 50 times with a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the special figure (1) big hit -6), and the time reduction number is not given with the remaining 65% probability.

  In the case of the small hit, after the small hit game is finished, the game state before the small hit is not changed in principle and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit is made during the ST, the ST is restarted after the small hit game is finished, so as to continue counting from the ST count related to the hit determination for the small hit. For example, during the ST, when the small hit is made at the 60th time, the ST is restarted so that counting from the 61st time after the small hit game is completed. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, when a small hit is made during the short-time state, the short-time state is resumed after the small-hit game is finished, so that counting is continued from the number of times related to the hit determination.

  As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time (which is the final time of ST) during ST, ST is ended after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit) Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time in the short-time state of 100 times, the short-time state is ended after the small-hit game is finished (the state before the small-hit is not maintained).

  Hereinafter, the winning content (big hit content and small hit content) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the content of the big hit (type of big hit) is 15R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 10R normal, substantial 5R probability variation, substantial 5R normal, special probability variation, special normal, substantial output. There is a slight variation, and a small amount of actual appearance. In addition, two small openings (1) and (2) are provided as small hit contents (small hit types).

  15R probability change and 15R normal is a jackpot where the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. is there. In this way, in the 15R probability variation and 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the upper limit number of game balls are set to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

  The real 10R probability change and the real 10R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big prize opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the eleventh to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the actual 10R probability change and the actual 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  The real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal means that when the big hit game is started, the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the first to fifth rounds is 27.996 seconds when the big hit game is started. This is a jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the sixth to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. In this way, in the real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set to be able to enter the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so that it is difficult (substantially impossible) to win the big winning opening 540.

  Special probability change and special normal are set so that the big prize opening 540 is opened three times in the first round of all 15 rounds when the big hit game is started, and the first round In the first and second opening, the opening number of the grand prize opening 540 is set to 0.896 seconds, and in the remaining third opening, the opening number of the big winning opening 540 is set to 26.466 seconds. From the 15th round to the 15th round, the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round is a big hit set at 27.966 seconds. In this way, in the special probability change and special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds in the first round (for example, 1 per round It is set so that the upper limit number of game balls can be won in the big winning opening 540 in the remaining third release and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability change and special normal, the interval between releases between the second release and the third release in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In the case of the real appearance small play change and the real play small normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the first to second rounds out of all 15 rounds. Is set to 896 seconds, and is the jackpot in which the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 per round in the third to fifteenth rounds is set to 0.102 seconds. As described above, in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual number of balls and a small amount of actual balls, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds (more specifically, the first and second rounds) Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won per opening and the game ball is almost impossible to win after the third round. Note that the interval between rounds between the second round and the third round is set to 5.0 seconds in the case where there is a substantial change in the actual appearance and a small amount of actual appearance.

  Opening twice (1) and (2) are small hits that open the big winning opening 540 twice every 0.896 seconds when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the big prize opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing manner. Thus, in the two-time opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game The ball is set so that it is difficult to win a ball in the big winning opening 540 (for example, about one winning per opening). In the second opening (1), the small hitting end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. In the second opening (2), the small hitting end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

  Thus, when the type of jackpot is special probability variation and special normal, the number of seconds of opening of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second rounds of the first round, and the case of the small jackpot (open twice (1) And in the case of (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the special probability change and special normal, and the small hits (two times opening (1) and (2)), the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is the same until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Is set. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal big hit games open and close the big prize opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit open / close mode) that makes the small hit game appear in the first and second rounds of the first round. It is something to be made.

  It should be noted that in the small hits (second open (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the opening of the second big winning opening 540 are set to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the opening of the second big prize opening 540 is set to 5.0 seconds.

  In addition, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability change and special normal and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. (5.0 seconds). That is, in the special probability change and special normal, and the small opening twice (2), the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is set to be the same until the third opening of the big prize opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability change and special normal jackpot games are determined to be jackpot games after the third release of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and special normal big hit games are operated in the pseudo small hit opening / closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened / closed in a specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after the big hit is found) that turns out to be a big hit game. It is something to be made.

  Similarly, the number of seconds for opening the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of the big hit is a real change in the actual number of balls and the normal amount of the actual number of balls and the case of a small hit (opened twice) In the case of (1) and (2)), the number of seconds for opening the big prize opening 540 in the first and second opening is set to 0.896 seconds which are the same as each other. In other words, the actual payout small change, the normal play small normal, and the small hit (2 times opening (1) and (2)) are the big prize opening 540 until the second opening of the big prize opening 540 is completed. Are set to be the same.

  In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the actual change of the actual number of balls and the normal amount of the actual number of balls, and the small hit end interval in the second opening (2) of the small hits Are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds). That is, the actual appearance of a small amount of balls and the normal amount of small numbers of balls and the small opening twice (2) means that the opening mode of the big prize opening 540 is until the third opening of the big prize opening 540 is started. Set the same. In this way, the big hit game of the real hitting small probability change and the real hitting little normal hit game is a big winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hitting opening / closing mode) that looks like the small hit game in the first and second rounds of opening. Is opened and closed.

[Game flow]
Below, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described using FIG. 7 and FIG.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game proceeds while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, a corresponding production mode is set for each of the gaming states. Various production contents are set in the production mode. That is, when the game is started, the game state is shifted to an appropriate game state, and an effect in the effect mode corresponding to the transferred game state is performed. In the present embodiment, effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as effect modes.

  As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is a normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time reduction (non-electric support) state). In the normal gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the hit determination by the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a hold of the variable display of the second special symbol when 100 power support states are completed, for example, the hit determination of the second special symbol is the maximum number of hold times in the normal gaming state. When the upper limit is set to four times and the result of the determination results in some big hit, the power support state is entered. However, since this is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. It should be noted that, since the power support state has been completed for the above four times, it is possible to return to the power support state if a big hit is made at that time. While performing the hit determination, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special production mode different from the production mode 1.

  In the normal gaming state, the big hit determination is performed by starting winning of the first starting port 5442 by so-called left-handed. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit and the gaming state shifts to the short time (electric support) state, so-called right-handed is performed. In this way, while the short time (electric support) state continues, the big hit determination is performed by the start winning of the second start port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first start port 5442 becomes a big hit, when the gaming state does not shift to the short-time (electric support) state (the gaming state is non-short-time (non-electric support) state Left-handed).

  When the gaming state shown in step S900 is in a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit judgment (win judgment) is a special figure (1) big hit When -1, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended, and the effect in the effect mode 2 is started (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to 50 times.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− When it becomes any one of 1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S910, S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Note that, in the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the ST number is set to 100 times, and the time reduction number is set to continue during the probability changing state (up to 100 times).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 1 to 3 is reached, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S912 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is continued. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number and the short time number counted until the big hit is cleared. That is, the ST number and the time reduction number are counted from 0.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit − When any of 4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 3 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability variation state) and the short-time state end, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S914 and S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the short-time state end, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is not restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the production in the production mode 3 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit− If it becomes any of 4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 2 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit −1 If it becomes any of 3 from 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability variation state / short time (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (2) big hit -4 If it becomes any of 6 from 6, the game state will again shift to the non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S923, S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the production mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (open twice (1 ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the short-time state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is an uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (100 times), the time reduction state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 4 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (the hit determination) is determined (open twice ( In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is in the probabilistic state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) is lost. The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so the probability variation state / non-time reduction ( The gaming state shifts to the (non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 2 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and the short time number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect in effect mode 2 is continued.

  As described above, when the production in the production mode 2 is finished and the production in the production mode 5 is started, the ST (probability variation state) continues, while the time reduction (electric support) state is finished. That is, the player makes a left strike instead of a right strike. In the present embodiment, the effect in effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect in effect mode 1. Thus, when the production of the production mode 5 is started, the player enters a gaming state (latent probability variation state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability variation state) is continuing. The production in the production mode 5 may have the same content as the production in the production mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability changing state has been determined.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When either the big hit -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state / short time (electric support) state (steps S934, S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -3, the gaming state shifts again to the probability variation state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S935 and S933). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the ST number counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, a normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 1 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is the special figure (1). When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 5 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started. Along with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a certain change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the production in the production mode 5 is performed, The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, ST (probability change state) ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is finished, and the production in the production mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is The process is resumed (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the production in the production mode 5 is continued.

  Note that the predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what the presentation of the presentation mode 5 currently being started is triggered. Specifically, when the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed is triggered by the number of hit determinations being 50 after the production of the production of the production mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5). On the other hand, the currently performed effect in the effect mode 5 is the special figure (1) big hit -2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) big hit -3 shown in step S935. Is started as a trigger, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 (from the start of the effect in effect mode 5).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -6, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 6 is started (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When it becomes any one of -1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to a probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 ends and the effect in the effect mode 3 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (2) big hit When any of -4 to 6 is reached, the gaming state shifts to a non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state (steps S953 and S921). In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 6 is ended and the effect in the effect mode 4 is started. Along with this transition of the gaming state, the short time count counted until the big hit is cleared.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is in the uncertain change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (win determination) is determined (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time-short state is completed, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support) state) is maintained, and the short time number is not cleared. The count is restarted (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the production in the production mode 6 is continued.

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is the non-probable change state / short time (electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (win determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number (50 times), the time reduction state ends, so the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect in effect mode 6 ends and the effect in effect mode 1 is started. On the other hand, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not a predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / short time (electric support)) is maintained, the short time number is not cleared, Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state (steps S960, S933). That is, the production in the production mode 1 is finished, and the production in the production mode 5 is started.

  Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-short-time (non-electric support) state and the effect in the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (win determination) is a special figure (1 ) When the big hit is -4 or 5, the game state shifts to the normal game state again. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect in the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

  In addition, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probable change state / non-time-saving (non-electric support) state and the production of the production mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit judgment (hit judgment) is lost, The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect in effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

  In such a game flow, when the production mode 2 is started (step S902), the ST state is set to 100 times by shifting the game state to the probability change state / short time (electric support) state. The Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the ST state is set to 100 times when the gaming state shifts to the probability variation state / short time (electric support) state. Thus, after the production mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained (in principle) after the small hit game ends. , ST count is not cleared and counting is resumed. In this way, the effect in the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

  Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened twice so that one game ball is won per opening. In other words, when the production mode 2 or 3 is started (when ST is started), for example, the number of hit determinations is a predetermined number of times until the production mode ends (until the ST ends). In the meantime, the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit game, and the number of game balls at hand of the player can be increased.

  In the following, an ST in which a prize ball is obtained by a small hit game and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased is referred to as a super-probability change state. In addition, a game in which a winning ball is obtained by a small hit game after entering the super-probability change state and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per time) continues from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probable change state until the next big hit or the end of the short-time state. As described above, in the present embodiment, a game in which the short-time state ends (for example, a game of 100 hits or 50 hits described later) is a rush end condition.

  In addition, after the production mode 2 is started, when the production mode 3 is started by any one of the special figures (2) jackpot -1 to 3, the game state before and after the jackpot is in a highly probable state. For this reason, it is assumed that the super-probable variation state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush is continuously performed (the second rush is performed).

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a super-probable change state is set, a payout display regarding the acquired payroll is performed. The detailed explanation about the above-mentioned payout display will be described later.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, a main process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs backup restoration processing, initialization setting processing, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

  In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the rendering condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

  In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 and an opening time timer for the big prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

  In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a win according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. The processing to do is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a win according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49 a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

  In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination result of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in step S13 and step S14. Then, a process of storing a control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and the normal symbol display unit 71. Thus, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 performs variable display and stop display of the special symbol based on the received control signal. Moreover, the normal symbol display part 71 carries out the variable display and stop display of a normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

  In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device or the hall computer). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

  In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the special winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second start opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

  In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

  In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs payout processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 receives game balls in various winning holes (specifically, the big winning hole 540, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440, and the general winning ports 53, 54, and 450). It is determined whether or not When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has won at various winning ports, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the win to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, a system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

  In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register saving process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

  In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number counter, the jackpot symbol determination random value counter, and the like. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

  In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the passing gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, and the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451). Or the like) (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected in various switches). The main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 200 when it is determined that a game ball has been detected at any of the various switches (when a game ball has won at any of the various winning ports). . For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a big prize opening prize command to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. Details of this process will be described later.

  In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 101 restores the saved program to the register. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, numerical values written on the sides of step S <b> 101 to step S <b> 108 indicate control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in steps S101 to S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 103.

  In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

  In step S101 to step S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform the process in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and determines each process at a predetermined timing set for each step according to the determination result. Process in steps. As a result, the specific symbol game proceeds. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. The main CPU 101 also performs a system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined intervals, separately from this subroutine.

  In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

  In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. And a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 performs setting so that the process of step S103 is performed after a waiting time after determination has elapsed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

  In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has passed, the main CPU 101 receives a hit determination result (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not. When the result of the hit determination is win, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

  In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal to open the special winning opening 540 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , And supply to the grand prize opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs opening / closing control of the special winning opening 540.

  Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the special winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

  In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter when the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that “1” is increased. The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

  In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process. In this process, when the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating that the big prize opening is being opened, the main CPU 101 has passed the condition that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, and the opening upper limit time ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the big winning opening opening time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 101 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, while setting a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to control status flag. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

  In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

  In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  As described above, when the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag, the special symbol game is advanced. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “07H” when the hit determination result is lost in the case of not being in the big hit or small hit gaming state. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is big hit or small hit, the control state flag is set to “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H”. By setting in order, the processing of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 is performed at a predetermined timing to control to the big hit or small hit gaming state. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H” and “05H” when the control to the big hit or the small hit game state is performed, thereby performing steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. The big hit or the small hit game is performed at the predetermined timing. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04H”, “06H”, and “07H” when the big hit or small hit game ending condition is satisfied, so that step S105 shown in FIG. The processing of step S107 and step S108 is performed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit or small hit game is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol storage check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, it moves the process to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 111, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining the presence or absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, from the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data (a random number for hit determination) is stored from the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 sets a value that permits execution of the demonstration display as the demonstration display permission value when the state in which the special symbol game start-up memory is 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Then, the main CPU 101 sets a demonstration display command when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the demonstration display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is zero. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is data in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is zero. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S <b> 114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the variation of the second special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S <b> 115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the variation of the first special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

  In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol memory transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 transfers each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 uses the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) for the second special symbol. A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit determination table from a plurality of hit determination tables having different numbers of determination values (hit determination values) that are big hits based on the read high probability flag. To do. That is, when the high probability flag has a predetermined value, the high probability hit (big hit) determination table with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not the predetermined value, the big hit determination A normal hit (big hit) determination table with a small value is referred to. Thus, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved as compared with the normal time.

  Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a random number value for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (is lost) when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value do not match. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player (big hit determination) in the big hit determination processing. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

  In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the big hit determination process in step S118 is not a big hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 pre-sets the hit determination random number value of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the determination value for the small hit matches. Then, the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 determines that there is no small hit (lost) when the hit determination random number value does not match the small hit determination value. In this way, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to enter the small hit gaming state (small hit determination) in the small hit determination process.

  In this embodiment, two types of normal determination and high probability (probability variation) are prepared as a hit determination random number stored in the first special symbol start storage area and a hit determination table to be referenced. There are two types of hit determination tables, one for normal use and one for high probability (for probability variation), as a hit determination table to be referenced with the random number value for hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. A table is provided. Note that the two types of normal hit determination tables have the same big hit probability, and the two types of high hit determination tables have the same big hit probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table, which are referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Are the same. In addition, the number of small hit determination values in the normal hit determination table and the high probability (probability change) hit determination table referred to the hit determination random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. It is. As described above, the main CPU 101 can obtain a larger number of game balls than the normal game state on the condition that the game balls have passed the start area (first start port 5442, second start port 440). 1 hit game state, second hit game state where a small amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first hit game state, and third hit where a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained It is an example of the hit determination means for determining whether to shift to the gaming state.

  Note that the small hit probability due to winning at the first start port 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the small hit probability due to winning at the second start port 440. The big hit probability due to winning in the first start opening 5442 of the normal game may be larger or smaller than the big hit probability due to winning in the second start opening 440.

  As described above, the process of steps S118 and S119 determines one of big hit, small hit, and loss as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the hit determination result is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the hit determination result is a small hit, and if neither the big hit nor the small hit is obtained, That is, in the case of losing, the losing symbol is determined. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

  In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a variation pattern for determining a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the processing of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processing of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) the variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random number extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data indicating such a variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 with the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure variation pattern designation command. Thereby, the effect display according to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation | designated command is performed by control of the sub control circuit 200. FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

  In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

  In step S <b> 123, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 starts an effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

  In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variation display. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S151. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S156.

  In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is (01H), it moves the process to step S152. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the variation state number is not (01H), the process proceeds to step S154.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

  In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

  In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big special symbol data of the second special symbol and the big special symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Also, the main CPU 101 sets the big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the big hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S160. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S164.

  In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

  In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data for a small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. . As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the winning symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 hits a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and sets hit start interval display time data corresponding to a symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

  In step S <b> 163, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data related to the number of times of winning a prize opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the big prize opening number related data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 164, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting data for a lost symbol and a command for a lost symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and the first special symbol display unit according to whether the changing special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 displays the special symbol in a variable manner, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the loss symbol data of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a loss stop display mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, the process proceeds to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

  In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

  In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after determination. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the post-confirmation waiting time in an area that functions as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S302. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S304.

  In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 303, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the game state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S305.

  In step S <b> 305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S325. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S <b> 306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

  In step S <b> 307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the hourly number counter is “0”, it moves the process to step S308. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S325.

  In step S <b> 308, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the time count flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

  In step S <b> 309, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a time reduction end command in the main RAM 103. The short time end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the short time. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

  In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S326.

  In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

  In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST number counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When determining that the ST number counter is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S328. On the other hand, when determining that the ST number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310.

  In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the ST number flag in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

  In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

  In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S311. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the process proceeds to step S315.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

  In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. In addition, although the hit start interval time is determined for each hit type, in this embodiment, at least the special probability change, the special normal, the real output small probability change, the real output small normal and the special figure (2) small hit -2 The hitting start interval time is set to be the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

  In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process of step S314.

  In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 recognizes the start of big hit or small hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

  In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Period start interval management processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (the hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 403, the main CPU 101 sets the special winning opening opening number counter upper limit value of the main RAM 103.

  In step S <b> 404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

  In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or for a small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

  In step S <b> 406, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the special winning opening open display command is data indicating the first round. The special prize opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special prize opening opening command. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

  In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

  In step S <b> 408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

  In step S <b> 409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

  In step S <b> 410, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will drive the special prize opening solenoid 620 to open the special prize opening 540. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
In the following, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process. If the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

  In step S <b> 503, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The display command data during the big prize opening opening is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The special winning opening open display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform round counter +1. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

  In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

  In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S506. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S <b> 506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

  In step S <b> 507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

  In step S <b> 508, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening process]
In the following, the subroutine (big prize opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the big winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the grand prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the big prize opening winning counter is “10” or more, it moves the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the grand prize winning prize counter is not “10” or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S602.

  In step S <b> 602, the main CPU 101 performs a big prize opening / closing process according to the set round / small opening / closing pattern. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening / closing the special winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the special prize opening 540 a plurality of times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the special prize opening 540 after waiting for time in accordance with the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit I do. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S603.

  Here, in this embodiment, special probability change, special normal interval time between the first opening of the first round and the second opening, special figure (2) small opening -2 of the first opening and the second opening The interval time between the releases is set to the same or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds). That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability change, special normal, special figure (2) small hit -2 is “0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 second open interval time → 0.896 second open time”. It will be executed in the order of “time”. In addition, although not processed in this step, it is set in step S607, but the interval time between the rounds of the first round and the second round of the actual first and second rounds is also the same or By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), the opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → two rounds of 0.896 seconds It is executed in the order of “opening time of eyes”. Thereby, even if it is based on the time when the special winning opening 540 is closed, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the hit type.

  In step S <b> 603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the big prize opening time timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S <b> 604, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big prize opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the special winning opening 540. The variables stored in this way will close the special prize opening solenoid 620. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

  In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs processing for determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S610. If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not the small hit, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S <b> 606, the main CPU 101 performs processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the special winning opening open count upper limit. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the upper winning opening opening count upper limit value or more, and the main winning opening opening count value is determined as the large winning opening opening count. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is exceeded. If the main CPU 101 determines that the winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the winning opening opening upper limit, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not greater than or equal to the winning opening opening count upper limit, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S607.

  In step S <b> 607, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

  In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

  In step S <b> 609, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 610, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

  In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S <b> 612, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting an interval end display command per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the hit determination result is a big hit, a big hit end display command is set, and when the hit determination result is a small hit, a small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval process) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the process proceeds to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), this subroutine ends.

  In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the main CPU 101 sets the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval to “0”. It is determined whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S702, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 101 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to a step S703.

  In step S <b> 703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting control data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, a game state such as a normal game state or a probability change state is set as control data. Further, the main CPU 101 sends an end command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, a subroutine (special symbol game end process) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to step S711. When it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, this subroutine is ended.

  In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 103 as a control state flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
Hereinafter, processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as a display process.

[Sub control main processing]
First, a sub control main process performed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to power-on. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates random number values stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, effect determination random value, jackpot effect determination random value, stop symbol determination random value, etc.). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

  In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs display control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

  In the display control circuit 204, when data is received from the sub CPU 201, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 performs various kinds of data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and production image data based on the received data. Are read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs control of sound generated from the speaker 24 and light emission control of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

  In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs an accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation or lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207. For the control of the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201, the control of the operations of the first movable accessory unit (direction device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83 is performed. Is included. When this process is finished, the process is transferred again to the random value update process in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 22 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and a timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, a timer interrupt process performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs timer update processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 22 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and a command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves values used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command, it moves the process to step S1402. On the other hand, when determining that there is no reception command, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for reading the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads a command stored in the reception buffer. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a big prize winning command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a big prize opening prize command, it moves the process to step S1405.

  In step S <b> 1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the big hit winning number counter and the total winning number counter. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data relating to the number of winning balls (the number of acquired gaming balls) acquired by the player due to the winning of a gaming ball in the special winning opening 540. Note that the big win winning number counter and the total winning number counter start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a break. Thus, each time a big hit or a small hit is made, data relating to the number of winning balls is acquired. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special symbol designation command, it moves the process to step S1407.

  In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1408. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special figure variation pattern designation command, it moves the process to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted effect determination random number. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the process proceeds to step S1410. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1411.

  In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a big hit start effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a special winning opening opening effect display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a bonus opening opening effect display command, the process proceeds to step S1412. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an effect display command during opening of the big prize opening, the process proceeds to step S1413.

  In step S <b> 1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect during the opening of the special winning opening. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an inter-round display command, it moves the process to step S1415.

  In step S <b> 1414, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining effects between rounds. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a hit end display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1416. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit end display command, it moves the process to step S1417.

  In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining an effect at the end of the big hit. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S <b> 1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a time reduction end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a time reduction end command, it moves the process to step S1418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a time saving end command, it moves the process to step S1419.

  In step S <b> 1418, the sub CPU 201 performs control such as clearing the short time flag and ending the short time display. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

  In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to the received other command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Normal electric accessory unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a base member 410, a front side plate portion 420, a guide path 430, a second start port 440, a general winning opening 450, and an ordinary electric accessory 460.

  The base member 410 shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, and FIGS. 31 and 32 is a member that is the basis of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The base member 410 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 are attached to the base member 410.

  The front side plate portion 420 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is a member disposed at the front end portion of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. The front side plate portion 420 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 420 faces the base member 410 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed in a state of being separated forward from the base member 410. Thus, a gap is formed between the front side plate portion 420 and the base member 410 to allow a game ball to enter (hereinafter referred to as “general-purpose utility space R1”). The utility utility space R1 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate 420 and the base member 410 in a front view. The front side plate portion 420 is attached to the base member 410 via screws or the like. The front side plate part 420 is made of a transparent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate part 420.

  The guidance path 430 shown in FIGS. 27 to 32 guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction as appropriate. The guide path 430 is formed by a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) that is erected rearward from the front side plate portion 420. The guide path 430 includes a first guide path 431, a second guide path 432, a third guide path 433, a fourth guide path 434, and a fifth guide path 435.

  The first guiding path 431 is disposed in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the universal utility space R1. The first guide path 431 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The first guiding path 431 is formed at a substantially central portion of the universal utility space R1 in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the first guide path 431 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right center portion of the universal utility space R1. The right end portion of the first guiding path 431 is formed slightly on the right side of the left and right center portion of the general electric utility space R1. The first guide path 431 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right to the left. The first guide path 431 includes a speed reduction rib 481.

  The deceleration rib 481 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 431 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 481 includes a rear protrusion 481 a that protrudes forward from the base member 410 and a front protrusion 481 b that protrudes rearward from the front plate portion 420. A plurality of rear projections 481a and a plurality of front projections 481b are provided (two in this embodiment), and are spaced apart from each other along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 431. Be placed.

  With such a configuration of the first guide path 431, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 431) moves while colliding with the rear protrusion 481a and the front protrusion 481b, and thus the movement speed is reduced. It will be.

  The second guiding path 432 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower left end of the universal utility space R1. The second guide path 432 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The second guiding path 432 is formed in the left part of the general electric utility space R1. The left end portion of the second guide path 432 is formed at the left end portion of the universal utility space R1. The right end portion of the second guiding path 432 is formed slightly to the left of the left and right center portion of the universal utility space R1. The second guide path 432 configured in this way guides the game ball that has moved from the right to the left.

  The third taxiway 433 is disposed substantially on the upper right side of the second taxiway 432 in the universal utility space R1. The third guide path 433 is formed in a substantially curved shape that extends while curving from the left to the lower right. The entrance of the third guiding path 433 is the upper left end portion of the third guiding path 433 and is formed between the left end portion of the first guiding path 431 and the right end portion of the second guiding path 432. The entrance of the third guide path 433 is opened toward the upper left. The third guiding path 433 configured in this way guides the game ball that has moved to the lower right. The third guide path 433 includes a guide part 482.

  The guide part 482 is formed at the lowermost part of the third guide path 433. The guide part 482 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in a side view. The guide part 482 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 433 backward.

  The fourth guiding path 434 is disposed at the right end portion of the general electric utility space R1. The fourth guide path 434 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the upper right to the lower left. The fourth guiding path 434 is formed so as to extend from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the general electric utility space R1. The fourth guide path 434 is formed to be adjacent to the first guide path 431 on the left and right. The fourth guide path 434 thus formed guides the game ball that has moved to the lower left. The fourth guide path 434 includes a speed reduction rib 483.

  The deceleration rib 483 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the fourth guide path 434 (deceleration means). The speed reduction rib 483 includes one rear protrusion 483a that protrudes forward from the base member 410 and two front protrusions 483b that protrude rearward from the front plate portion 420. The rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are each formed in a longitudinal shape extending in the left-right direction in a side view. Thus, the rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are formed so as to be substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the fourth guide path 434 when viewed from the front. The rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (not opposed in the front-rear direction but shifted in the vertical direction).

  With such a configuration of the fourth guide path 434, the game ball (moved by the fourth guide path 434) moves while colliding with the rear protrusion 483a and the front protrusion 483b, and thus the moving speed decreases. It will be.

  The fifth guiding path 435 is disposed below the first guiding path 431 in the general electric utility space R1. The fifth guide path 435 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the top to the bottom. The upper side of the fifth guide path 435 is covered with a wall portion that forms the first guide path 431. The entrance of the fifth guide path 435 is formed at the upper right end of the fifth guide path 435 (the upper end of the left wall portion forming the fourth guide path 434). The entrance of the fifth guide path 435 is opened toward the right side (the fourth guide path 434 side). The fifth guide path 435 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from above to below. The fifth guide path 435 includes a guide 484.

  The guide 484 is formed at the lowermost part of the fifth guide path 435. The guide 484 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in a side view. The guide 484 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the fifth guide path 435 backward.

  The second starting port 440 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The second start port 440 is formed at the rear of the lowermost portion of the fifth guide path 435 (the back of the guide 484). The second start port 440 includes a second start port switch 441. The second start port switch 441 is disposed near the lowermost portion of the fifth guide path 435 (immediately above the fifth guide path 435).

  The general winning opening 450 shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 410 in the front-rear direction. The general winning opening 450 is formed behind the lowermost part of the third guide path 433 (behind the guide part 482). The general winning opening 450 includes a general winning opening switch 451 (see FIG. 5).

  27 and FIG. 28 and FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 each include a blade member 461 and a start-up solenoid 462.

  The blade member 461 is a member formed in a blade shape. The blade member 461 is rotatably supported by the base member 410 and the front side plate portion 420 via a rotation shaft 463 protruding in the front-rear direction. The blade member 461 is disposed at the entrance of the fifth guide path 435. Thus, the blade member 461 can open and close the entrance of the fifth guide path 435. When the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guide path 435, the tip side of the blade member 461 enters the fourth guide path 434. Thus, when the blade member 461 opens the entrance of the fifth guide path 435, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is guided into the fifth guide path 435.

  The start opening solenoid 462 drives the blade member 461. The start port solenoid 462 is disposed behind the base member 410. The start port solenoid 462 is configured to be able to transmit a driving force to the blade member 461 via a gear (not shown) or the like.

  In this way, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is configured such that the entrance of the fifth guide path 435 can be opened and closed by driving the blade member 461 by the start port solenoid 462. When the blade member 461 is opened, a part of the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is guided into the fifth guide path 435 and is easy to pass to the second start port 440. (Open state). Further, when the blade member 461 is closed, the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 is not guided into the fifth guide path 435. That is, it becomes a state (closed state) in which passage to the second starting port 440 is difficult.

In the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is appropriately guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 430.
In addition, the description about the rolling aspect of the game ball in the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be described later.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44.

  The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front side plate portion 520, a guide path 530, a special winning opening 540, a rear side case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

  The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 33 to 38 and FIGS. 40 and 41 is a member that is the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is disposed with its longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction and its plate surface facing the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

  The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper part of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left in a front view. In the slit 511, a shutter 610 described later (more specifically, a guide portion 611 of the shutter 610) is disposed.

  33 to 37 and 39 are members disposed at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front side plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front side plate portion 520 is disposed with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is disposed in a state of being spaced forward from the base member 510. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as “special electric appliance space R2”) is formed between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 so that a game ball can enter. In addition, the special electric appliance space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 in a front view. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via a screw or the like. The front side plate part 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the player can visually recognize the rear side of the front side plate part 520.

  The guiding path 530 shown in FIGS. 33 and 35 to 41 guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction as appropriate. The guide path 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) standing rearward from the front side plate portion 520. The guide path 530 includes a first guide path 531, a second guide path 532, and a third guide path 533.

  As described above, the guide path 530 (more specifically, the first guide path 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to advance and retract in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member 510 via a slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first guide path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward relative to the base member 510. Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made assuming that the shutter 610 has advanced forward relative to the base member 510 (the state where the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guiding path 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The length of the first guide path 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is slightly shorter than the base member 510. The left end portion of the first guide path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The right end portion of the first guiding path 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric utility space R2. The first guide path 531 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right to the left. The first guide path 531 includes a speed reduction rib 534.

  The deceleration rib 534 is for reducing the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 includes a plurality of rear protrusions 534a that protrude forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front protrusions 534b that protrude rearward from the front plate portion 520. In the present embodiment, six rear protrusions 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear protrusions 534a and front protrusions 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first guide path 531. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. Further, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (does not face in the front-rear direction but shift in the left-right direction).

  With such a configuration of the first guide path 531, the game ball (moved by the first guide path 531) has a rear projection 534 a and a front projection 534 b as shown in FIGS. Since it moves in a zigzag shape in plan view while it collides with the game (because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the moving speed will be reduced.

As described above, when the moving speed of the game ball moved by the first guide path 531 is decreased, a plurality of game balls are moved on the first guide path 531 as shown in FIG. Can create a situation. As described above, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guide path 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. Then, the winning prize opening 540 can be won. That is, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.
Even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if a lot of game balls stay on the shutter 610, many winnings can be generated.
In addition, since a large number of game balls can be won at once, it is easy to generate more wins (so-called over wins) than the number that can be won in one round of a big hit game.

  The second taxiway 532 is disposed immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electrical equipment space R2. The second guide path 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The tilt angle of the second guide path 532 is formed substantially the same as the tilt angle of the first guide path 531. Thus, the second guiding path 532 is configured as one substantially straight guiding path that is gently inclined from the right to the left together with the first guiding path 531. The second guiding path 532 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the first guiding path 531 side).

  The third guiding path 533 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the special electric utility space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guide path 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending while gently tilting from the right to the left. The third guiding path 533 is disposed below the first guiding path 531. The third guiding path 533 is formed in the same shape and size as the first guiding path 531 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 41 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is disposed between the left end portion of the third guide path 533 and the left end portion of the first guide path 531. In addition, a wall portion connected to the third guide path 533 is disposed between the right end portion of the third guide path 533 and the right end portion of the second guide path 532. Thus, the third guide path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

  The third guide path 533 configured in this manner guides the game ball that has moved from the right side to the left side (the big prize opening 540 side). The third guide path 533 includes a guide part 535.

  The guide part 535 is formed at the lowermost part of the third guide path 533. The guide part 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide portion 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

  37, FIG. 38, FIG. 40, and FIG. 41 are formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big prize opening 540 is formed at the rear of the lowermost portion of the third guide path 533 (the rear of the guide portion 535). The big prize opening 540 includes a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 37, the count switch 541 is disposed below the special winning opening 540.

  The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 to 37, 41, 43, and 44 includes various members (shutter 610, special prize opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 43, in the rear case 550, an upper space and a lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed in a two-story structure by the placement portion 551, and predetermined members are disposed in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are disposed in the upper space. In the lower space, a big prize solenoid 620 and the like are arranged. The rear side case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511.

  33, FIG. 35 to FIG. 38, and FIG. 40 to FIG. 44 each include a shutter 610, a special prize opening solenoid 620, and a link arm 630.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the shutter 610 includes a guiding portion 611, a connecting portion 612, and a rotating shaft 613.

  The guiding portion 611 is a member that forms the first guiding path 531. The guiding portion 611 is formed in an elongated and substantially flat plate shape. The guide portion 611 is disposed with its plate surface facing in the vertical direction and with its longitudinal direction facing in the left-right direction. The length of the guide portion 611 in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the slit 511 formed in the base member 510. The length in the front-rear direction (see L1 shown in FIG. 45 (a)) of the guiding portion 611 (more specifically, the portion of the guiding portion 611 that can be advanced into the special electric component space R2) is the special electric component space. It is formed to be shorter by a predetermined length (see L2 shown in FIG. 45A) than the length of R2 in the front-rear direction. In other words, even when the guiding portion 611 has advanced into the special electric utility space R2, a gap having a predetermined length is formed between the front end portion of the guiding portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. The In the present embodiment, the gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is set to be shorter than the radius of the game ball.

  The connection portion 612 is a member that connects the guide portion 611 and a rotation shaft 613 described later. The connection part 612 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. The connection part 612 is formed so as to extend rearward from the center part in the left-right direction of the guide part 611.

  The rotation shaft 613 is a member that receives the transmitted driving force. The rotation shaft 613 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the vertical direction. The rotation shaft 613 protrudes upward from the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connection portion 612.

Thus, the shutter 610 as a whole is formed in a substantially convex shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction is convex backward in plan view. The shutter 610 is accommodated in the rear case 550 in a state where the guide portion 611 is inserted into the slit 511. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the shutter 610 is mounted on the mounting portion 551 in the rear case 550 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Hereinafter, the position where the shutter 610 moves (displaces) most backward with respect to the placement unit 551 is referred to as a first position, and the shutter 610 moves (displaces) most forward with respect to the placement unit 551. The position is referred to as the second position.

  The big prize opening solenoid 620 drives the shutter 610. The big prize solenoid 620 is accommodated in the rear case 550. More specifically, the special winning opening solenoid 620 is disposed in a space below the placement portion 551 in the rear case 550. The big prize opening solenoid 620 is arranged in parallel to the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the shutter 610. As shown in FIG. 42A, the special winning opening solenoid 620 includes a coil part 621, a case 622, a plunger 623, a spring 624, and a transmission part 625.

  The coil portion 621 is a hollow cylindrical member around which an electric wire is wound. The coil unit 621 is configured to be energized. The coil unit 621 is configured to be switchable between an excited state when energized and a non-excited state when energized is released. When the coil portion 621 is in an excited state, it can generate a magnetic field inside and pull the plunger 623.

  The case 622 is a member that accommodates the coil portion 621. The case 622 is formed in a hollow substantially box shape having an upper side opened. A hole 626 that penetrates in the left-right direction is formed on the right side of the case 622.

  The plunger 623 is a substantially columnar member. The plunger 623 is arranged with the axial direction directed in the left-right direction. One end (left side) end of the plunger 623 is inserted into the coil portion 621 through the hole 626 of the case 622. The plunger 623 has a protruding position in which the other side (right side) end is separated from the coil unit 621 and a non-projecting adjacent to the coil unit 621 according to the excitation state or non-excitation state of the coil unit 621. The position is configured to be displaceable. The other end of the plunger 623 is formed in a flange shape.

  The spring 624 is a member that biases the plunger 623 toward the protruding position. The spring 624 is disposed between the case 622 and a transmission unit 625 described later while being inserted through the plunger 623. The spring 624 always urges the transmission portion 625 in the direction away from the case 622 (rightward).

  The transmission unit 625 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the special prize opening solenoid 620. The transmission part 625 is formed in a substantially box shape in plan view. The transmission part 625 is connected to the plunger 623 via a flange-shaped part formed at the other side (left side) end of the plunger 623. The transmission portion 625 is formed with an insertion hole 627 penetrating in the vertical direction in the center portion in plan view. The insertion hole 627 is formed in a long hole shape whose longitudinal direction is directed in the front-rear direction in plan view.

  When the coil portion 621 is in a non-excited state, the large winning opening solenoid 620 having such a configuration is arranged in a protruding position with the plunger 623 (and thus the transmission portion 625) being urged to the right by the spring 624. . In addition, when the coil unit 621 is switched from the non-excited state to the excited state, the plunger 623 (and hence the transmitting unit 625) is drawn into the coil unit 621 against the biasing force of the spring 624 (moves to the left). And are arranged in a non-protruding position. As described above, in the special winning opening solenoid 620, when the coil unit 621 is switched between the non-excited state and the excited state, a driving force is generated by the displacement of the transmitting unit 625.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the special winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately switches the position of the plunger 623 between the projecting position and the non-projecting position in order to generate a driving force. That is, the special winning opening solenoid 620 appropriately displaces the plunger 623 in the left-right direction in order to generate a driving force.

  The link arm 630 is a member that transmits the driving force generated by the special prize opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. That is, the link arm 630 is a member constituting a link mechanism. As shown in FIG. 42B, the link arm 630 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. One side through hole 631 penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at one end of the link arm 630. The one side through-hole 631 is formed in a substantially long hole shape in which the longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction in plan view. At the other end of the link arm 630, an other-side rotation shaft 632 protruding downward is formed. Between the one side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 and the other side rotation shaft 632, a central rotation shaft 633 protruding in the vertical direction is formed.

  The link arm 630 having such a configuration is rotatably supported in the rear case 550 via the central rotation shaft 633. Thus, the link arm 630 is configured to be rotatable in a clockwise direction in a plan view or in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view with the central rotation shaft 633 as a center. In addition, the rotation shaft 613 of the shutter 610 is inserted into the one side through hole 631 of the link arm 630 from below. The other side rotation shaft 632 of the link arm 630 is inserted from above into an insertion hole 627 formed in the transmission portion 625 of the big prize opening solenoid 620.

  In the special electric accessory 600 having such a configuration, the driving force generated by the special prize opening solenoid 620 can be transmitted to the shutter 610 via the link arm 630.

  Specifically, when the plunger 623 of the special winning opening solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 43 is switched to the non-projecting position from the state where the plunger 623 is in the projecting position (the state where the shutter 610 is retracted from the base member 510). Moves to the left. When the plunger 623 moves to the left, the link arm 630 rotates about the central rotation shaft 633 in the clockwise direction through the transmission portion 625. When the link arm 630 rotates clockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves backward from the second position to the first position as shown in FIG.

  Thus, when the shutter 610 is retracted backward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is disposed in the rear case 550 (arranged at the first position). When the guide part 611 of the shutter 610 is disposed in the rear case 550, the first guide path 531 is not formed, so that it is easy for the game ball to enter the third guide path 533 (and thus the big winning opening 540). It becomes a state.

  On the other hand, when the plunger 623 of the prize winning solenoid 620 shown in FIG. 44 is switched from the state in which the plunger 623 is in the non-projecting position (the state in which the shutter 610 has moved forward relative to the base member 510) to the projecting position. Moves to the right. When the plunger 623 moves to the right, the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in plan view about the central rotation shaft 633 via the transmission portion 625. When the link arm 630 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, the shutter 610 moves forward from the first position to the second position.

  Thus, when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510, the shutter 610 (more specifically, the guide portion 611) is disposed in the special electric utility space R2 (arranged at the second position). . When the guide part 611 of the shutter 610 is arranged in the special electric utility space R2, the first guide path 531 is formed, so that the game ball enters the third guide path 533 (and eventually the big prize opening 540). It becomes difficult.

  Thus, in the special electric accessory 600, the special winning opening solenoid 620 is in a direction different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves from the first position to the second position (that is, the front-rear direction) (that is, the left-right direction). ) Generate driving force. In addition, the direction of the driving force (left-right direction) generated by the special winning opening solenoid 620 is converted by the link arm 630 into the direction (front-back direction) in the direction in which the shutter 610 moves.

  Accordingly, the direction in which the special winning opening solenoid 620 is driven is set to a direction (left-right direction) different from the direction in which the shutter 610 moves (front-rear direction), so that the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the guide portion 611 of the shutter 610 (more specifically, the portion of the guide portion 611 that can advance into the special power feature space R2) is the special power feature space R2. It is formed to be shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Thus, since the moving distance (that is, the moving distance in the front-rear direction) when the shutter 610 moves between the first position and the second position can be shortened, the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the link arm 630 is rotated clockwise or in a plan view around the central rotation shaft 633 in accordance with the switching of the position of the plunger 623 (non-projecting position or projecting position) in the prize winning solenoid 620. It is rotated counterclockwise. For this reason, for example, the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is changed according to the switching of the position of the plunger 623.

  Specifically, when the plunger 623 is switched to the protruding position (that is, when the shutter 610 is in the second position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is the central rotation axis of the link arm 630. It becomes a part near 633 (see B10 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, for example, when the plunger 623 is switched to the non-projecting position (that is, when the shutter 610 is in the first position), the position of the rear end portion of the link arm 630 is one side of the link arm 630. This is a portion in the vicinity of the through hole 631 (see B20 in FIG. 44).

  In such a configuration, the position of the rear end portion of the prize winning solenoid 620 (B30 shown in FIGS. 43B and 44B) is the rear of the link arm 630 regardless of the position of the plunger 623. It arrange | positions ahead rather than the position of an edge part (refer FIG.43 (b) and FIG.44 (b)). In other words, the rear end portion of the special winning opening solenoid 620 is arranged in front (front side) of the rear end portion (end portion on the back side of the gaming machine) of the link arm 630. Thus, the attacker unit 500 is formed compact in the depth direction.

  Note that a magnetic detection device 700 for preventing fraud using a magnet is disposed behind the attacker unit 500 (more specifically, behind the left part of the rear case 550) (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 43). (See FIG. 44). Thus, in this embodiment, since the attacker unit 500 is compactly formed in the depth direction, a space for arranging other game components is provided behind the attacker unit 500.

In the attacker unit 500 having such a configuration, the moving game ball is appropriately guided in a predetermined direction by the guide path 530.
In addition, the description about the rolling aspect of the game ball in the attacker unit 500 is mentioned later.

  In the following, with reference to FIG. 46 to FIG. 51, the rolling aspect of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 46, the mutual arrangement relationship between the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed above the attacker unit 500. The left end portion of the second guiding path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is disposed to the right of the left end portion of the first guiding path 531 of the attacker unit 500 in the left-right direction. That is, the game ball guided by the second guiding path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is released (rolled) to the first guiding path 531 of the attacker unit 500 after being released from the second guiding path 432. can do.

  Further, in the extending direction (lower left) of the fourth guiding path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the second guiding path 532 of the attacker unit 500 and the right end portion of the first guiding path 531 are arranged. That is, the game ball guided by the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is released from the fourth guide path 434 and then the second guide path 532 or the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. Can fall to the right end.

  Below, the rolling mode of the game ball in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 and the attacker unit 500 will be described by specifically illustrating the game ball rolling in the game area 20.

In FIG. 47, three game balls (game ball Pa1, game ball Pb1, and game ball Pc1) are illustrated as game balls rolling in the game area 20.
First, the rolling mode of the game ball Pa1 among the three game balls will be described below.

  The game ball Pa1 falls (rolls) to the center in the left-right direction of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. Such a game ball Pa1 falls on the first guide path 431 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as shown in FIG. The game ball Pa1 dropped on the first guide path 431 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the first guide path 431 (see the game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48A).

  The game ball Pa2 shown in FIG. 48A is guided to the lower left by the first guide path 431, and then released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. Thus, the game ball Pa2 released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 falls to the lower left as it is (see the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47), or collides with the latest game nail 68 and moves to the right. Rolled downward (see game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47).

  Thus, when the game ball PA3 shown in FIG. 47 rolls to the lower right, the game ball PA3 is guided to the third guide path 433 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. Thus, the game ball PA3 guided to the third guide path 433 is guided to the lower right by the third guide path 433 and wins the general winning opening 450 (see the game ball PA4 shown in FIG. 48B). .

  On the other hand, when the game ball Pa3 shown in FIG. 47 falls to the lower left as it is, it is guided to the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. Thus, the game ball Pa3 guided to the second guide path 432 is guided (rolled) to the lower left by the second guide path 432, and is released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 (FIG. 48). (See (b) and the game ball Pa4 shown in FIG. 49).

  Thus, when the shutter 610 is disposed at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed), the game ball Pa4 released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is an attacker. It falls on the first guide path 531 of the unit 500 (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50A). On the other hand, in the attacker unit 500, when the shutter 610 is disposed at the first position (when the first guide path 531 is not formed), the attacker unit 500 is placed on the third guide path 533. It falls (see game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 50B).

  In this way, the game ball that has fallen on the first guide path 431 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 passes through the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, or the first guide path 531 or the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. It can roll to the three guide path 533, and can win the big prize opening 540 according to the movement timing of the shutter 610.

  Next, the rolling mode of the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 among the three game balls will be described.

  The game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 shown in FIG. 47 are falling (rolling) toward the right portion of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. In this way, the game ball Pb1 and the game ball Pc1 falling to the right part of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 enter the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

  Among the game balls that have entered the fourth guide path 434, the game ball Pb1 that is falling on the left part of the fourth guide path 434 is the same when the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened. It is guided to the fifth guide path 435 by the blade member 461 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48A). Thus, the game ball Pb2 guided to the fifth guide path 435 wins the second starting port 440. In addition, the game ball Pb1 falling on the left side in the fourth guide path 434 remains as it is (without being guided to the fifth guide path 435) when the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. It falls in the fourth guiding path 434 (see the game ball Pb2 shown in FIG. 48B).

  In addition, the game ball Pc1 falling on the right part in the fourth guide path 434 is guided to the lower left by the fourth guide path 434, and is not guided to other guide paths, but is directly in the fourth direction. It falls within the guideway 434 (see the game ball Pc2 shown in FIGS. 48A and 49). Thus, when the game ball Pc2 that has fallen in the fourth guide path 434 is released to the outside of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, it falls onto the second guide path 532 of the attacker unit 500. The game ball Pc2 falling on the second guide path 532 is guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 (see the game ball Pc3 shown in FIG. 50).

  Thus, the game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 is the second guide when the shutter 610 is disposed at the second position (when the first guide path 531 is formed). It is guided to the first guide path 531 via the path 532. Then, the game ball Pc3 is guided to the lower left by the first guide path 531.

  The game ball Pc3 guided to the lower left by the second guide path 532 is when the shutter 610 is disposed at the first position (when the first guide path 531 is not formed), or when the first guide When the shutter 610 moves to the second position while being guided by the path 531, it falls on the third guide path 533 (see the game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50B).

  As described above, the game ball that has dropped in the fourth guide path 434 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 passes through the second guide path 532 of the attacker unit 500 to the first guide path 531 or the third guide path 533. It can roll and can win a big prize opening 540 according to the movement timing of the shutter 610.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the route of the game ball guided to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 is guided via the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. A route (hereinafter referred to as “first route”), a route guided through the second guide path 532 of the attacker unit 500 (hereinafter referred to as “second route”), Is provided.

  In this way, the game balls can be guided to the first guide path 531 (and hence the third guide path 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, so that there are more game balls than the case where there is only one route. Can be awarded to the grand prize opening 540 in a short period of time. That is, a large number of game balls can be won (passed) at a time to the big prize opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means. As a result, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

  In addition, since there are two routes of game balls guided to the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), they are guided to the first guide path 531 by different routes. Game balls may collide with each other. In such a case, since the game ball from the first route (see the game ball Pa5 shown in FIG. 51A) falls from above, the game ball from the second route (see FIG. 51A). In some cases, guidance of the game ball Pc3 shown) to the lower left is prevented. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 51B, the game ball Pa5 that has fallen from above collides with the game ball Pc3 that is guided to the lower left, and moves to the upper right on the first guide path 531. (See game ball Pc4 shown in FIG. 50B).

  As described above, the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is formed at a position where the released game ball can collide with the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500. Further, the second guide path 432 of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 collides the released game ball with the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 and rolls on the first guide path 531. The game ball can be temporarily reversed (moved to the upper right).

  Thus, when the game ball Pc3 moves to the upper right of the first guide path 531, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 can be further reduced, and consequently the first guide path It becomes easy to create a situation where a plurality of game balls are moving on 531. That is, since it is easy to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531, a large number of game balls can be awarded to the big prize opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means. Can do. As a result, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

The special winning opening 540 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the passage area.
The shutter 610 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of a displacement member.
Further, the special winning opening solenoid 620 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Moreover, the deceleration rib 534 and the 1st guide path 531 which concern on this embodiment are one Embodiment of a deceleration means.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot gaming machine, for example.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the big prize opening 540 was illustrated as an example of a passage area, it is not limited to this.

  In the present embodiment, the shutter 610 is illustrated as an example of the displacement member, but the present invention is not limited to this.

Moreover, in this embodiment, although the deceleration rib 534 and the 1st guide path 531 were illustrated as an example of a deceleration means, it is also possible to set it as a different structure from these.
Below, the 1st guideway 531 of the attacker unit 500 which concerns on another example is demonstrated using FIG.52 and FIG.53.

  The first guide path 531 of the attacker unit 500 according to another example is different from the above-described configuration in that a gap between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520 is set in the game ball. It is formed so as to be longer than the radius and shorter than the diameter.

  In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B, the game ball rolling on the first guide path 531 is formed between the front end portion of the guide portion 611 and the rear side surface of the front plate portion 520. The first guide path 531 rolls in a state where a part is fitted in the gap (a part of the part is lowered below the upper surface of the guide portion 611). Thus, the game ball can lengthen the flow down path. Further, when the game ball rolls on the first guide path 531, it rolls while contacting the rear side surface of the front side plate portion 520. In this way, the game ball rolls while making contact with other members, so that the moving speed of the game ball can be effectively reduced.

  In addition, the game ball collides with the front protrusion 534 b formed on the front plate portion 520 when rolling on the first guide path 531. Thus, when the game ball rolls over the collided front projection 534b, the game ball moves away from the front plate portion 520 in order to avoid the front projection 534b as shown in FIG. . Here, since the game ball is in a state where a part of the game ball has fallen below the upper surface of the guide portion 611, in order to move in a direction away from the front side plate portion 520, it is necessary to once cancel the fallen state. There is. That is, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the game ball consumes energy to increase the height from the depressed state, and the moving speed is effectively reduced.

  In addition, the moving speed of a game ball can be made into a desired thing by setting the clearance gap between the front-end part of the guidance | induction part 611, and the rear side surface of the front side board part 520 suitably.

[Configuration of second movable accessory unit 82]
Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 59.

  The second movable accessory unit 82 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The second movable accessory unit 82 mainly includes a base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and a movement control means 1800.

  The base member 1500 is provided with a first movable body 1600, a second movable body 1700, and a movement control means 1800. The first movable body 1600 is disposed in front of the base member 1500, and the second movable body 1700 is disposed in rear of the base member 1500. The movement control means 1800 can appropriately move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 relative to the base member 1500. Specifically, the movement control means 1800 can move the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 to a standby position (see FIG. 54) or an effect position (see FIG. 69) described later. By moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 at an appropriate timing, a visual impression can be given to the player.

  Hereinafter, the configuration of each member of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 74.

[Configuration of Base Member 1500]
The base member 1500 shown in FIGS. 54 to 59 supports each member constituting the second movable accessory unit 82. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1500 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The base member 1500 mainly includes an opening 1510, a sliding bar 1520, and an arc-shaped hole 1530.

  The opening 1510 is a portion formed so as to penetrate the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1510 is formed at the lower left and right center of the base member 1500. Specifically, the opening 1510 is formed so as to cut out from the lower end portion in the left and right central portion of the base member 1500 to the substantially vertical central portion. The opening 1510 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

  The sliding rod 1520 (see FIG. 56) guides the first movable body 1600. A pair of left and right sliding rods 1520 are provided at the left and right central portions of the base member 1500. The sliding bar 1520 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The sliding bar 1520 is disposed with its axial direction facing the up-down direction. The sliding rods 1520 are respectively arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 1510 in front view. The sliding rod 1520 (more specifically, the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the sliding rod 1520) is appropriately fixed to the front side surface of the base member 210.

  The arc-shaped hole 1530 penetrates the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction. The arc-shaped holes 1530 are formed in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the base member 1500, respectively. The arc-shaped hole 1530 is formed in an arc shape centering on a rotation shaft 1750 described later in front view.

[Configuration of First Movable Body 1600]
54, 55, 58, 60 and 61 are supported so as to be movable in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 1500, and a part of the first movable body 1600 itself is supported. It can also be moved (rotated). The first movable body 1600 is disposed on the front side of the base member 1500 by being attached to one side (front side) of the base member 1500. The first movable body 1600 mainly includes a base member 1610, a movable body 1620, a movement control means 1630, and a cover member 1640.

  A base member 1610 shown in FIG. 55 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1610 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front with the longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The base member 1610 is disposed in front of the left and right center portion (sliding bar 1520) of the base member 1500. Base member 1610 is connected to slide bar 1520 so as to be slidable. As a result, the base member 1610 is guided by the slide bar 1520 so as to be movable along the axial direction of the slide bar 1520 (that is, the vertical direction). The base member 1610 mainly includes a through hole 1611 and a connecting shaft 1612.

  The through-hole 1611 penetrates the base member 1610 in the front-rear direction. The through holes 1611 are respectively formed on the right side and the left side of the base member 1610 on the right and left sides (a pair of left and right).

  The connecting shaft 1612 is a substantially cylindrical member. The connecting shaft 1612 is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The connecting shaft 1612 is provided at each of the left and right ends of the base member 1610. The rear end portion of the connecting shaft 1612 is fixed while being inserted through the right end portion and the left end portion of the base member 1610.

  The movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 54, 60, and 61 is supported so as to be movable (rotatable) with respect to the base member 1610. A pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are provided with respect to the base member 1610. The left and right movable bodies 1620 are formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, the configuration of the right movable body 1620 will be specifically described below, and the description of the configuration of the left movable body 1620 will be omitted as appropriate. The movable body 1620 mainly includes a base member 1621, a substrate 1622, a light diffusion member 1623, a cover member 1624, and a rotating shaft 1625.

  A base member 1621 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 supports each member constituting the first movable body 1600. The base member 1621 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1621 is formed in a sharp shape with the right end portion pointed while the longitudinal direction is substantially in the left-right direction. The base member 1621 mainly includes a cylindrical portion 1621a and a long hole 1621b.

  The cylindrical portion 1621a is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction oriented in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1621 a is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the base member 1621.

  The long hole 1621b penetrates the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The long hole 1621b is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the base member 1621 (immediately right of the cylindrical portion 1621a). The long hole 1621b is formed to extend linearly by a predetermined distance from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1621a toward the right side (the right end side of the base member 1610).

  A substrate 1622 shown in FIG. 61 is one on which electronic components (functional components) are mounted. The substrate 1622 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1622 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1610 and is formed in a shape that substantially follows the base member 1610. On the front surface of the substrate 1622, a plurality of LEDs 1622 a are arranged at appropriate intervals. The substrate 1622 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1621.

  The light diffusing member 1623 appropriately diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1622a. The light diffusion member 1623 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusing member 1623 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1622. The light diffusing member 1623 is formed of a light-transmitting material. Appropriate irregularities are formed on the light diffusion member 1623 so that the light transmitted through the light diffusion member 1623 is diffused. The light diffusing member 1623 is disposed in front of the substrate 1622 so as to cover the substrate 1622 from the front. The light diffusion member 1623 is fixed to the base member 1621 through the substrate 1622 as appropriate.

  The cover member 1624 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1624 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1624 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1621. The cover member 1624 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The cover member 1624 is disposed in front of the base member 1621 and the like so as to cover the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, and the light diffusion member 1623 from the front. Cover member 1624 is fixed to base member 1621.

  The rotation shaft 1625 shown in FIGS. 54 and 60 is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotation shaft 1625 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1621a of the base member 1621 with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The rear end portion of the rotation shaft 1625 is fixed in a state of being inserted into a right through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610. In this manner, the base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625.

  The right movable body 1620 configured as described above is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the base member 1610 about the rotation shaft 1625. When the LED 1622a mounted on the substrate 1622 is turned on, the light from the LED 322 is diffused by the light diffusion member 1623 and irradiated to the cover member 1624. Thereby, the decoration applied to the cover member 1624 can be made conspicuous.

  Similar to the right movable body 1620, the left movable body 1620 is also rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1610 via the rotation shaft 1625. The rotation shaft 1625 that supports the left movable body 1620 is fixed in a state of being inserted into the left through hole 1611 (see FIG. 55) formed in the base member 1610.

  The movement control means 1630 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, 60 and 62 controls the movement (rotation) of the movable body 1620. The movement control means 1630 mainly includes a motor 1631 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1632.

  A motor 1631 shown in FIGS. 57 and 59 is a drive source for moving the movable body 1620. The motor 1631 is fixed to the lower part of the back surface (rear surface) of the base member 1610. An output shaft (not shown) of the motor 1631 is provided so as to penetrate the base member 1610 back and forth and protrude forward from the base member 1610.

  The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 shown in FIGS. 60 and 62 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1631 to the movable body 1620. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 is appropriately supported on the front surface of the base member 1610. The driving force transmission mechanism 1632 mainly includes an output gear 1632a, a right first transmission gear 1632b, a right second transmission gear 1632c, a left first transmission gear 1632d, a left second transmission gear 1632e, and a left third transmission gear 1632f.

  The output gear 1632a extracts the driving force of the motor 1631. The output gear 1632 a is fixed to the front end portion of the output shaft of the motor 1631.

  The right first transmission gear 1632b and the right second transmission gear 1632c are arranged in order on the right side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the right first transmission gear 1632b, and the right second transmission gear 1632c are engaged with each other. A columnar transmission shaft portion 1632g protruding forward from the right second transmission gear 1632c is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the right second transmission gear 1632c. The transmission shaft portion 1632g is inserted through the long hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620.

  The left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e, and the left third transmission gear 1632f are arranged in order on the left side of the output gear 1632a. The output gear 1632a, the left first transmission gear 1632d, the left second transmission gear 1632e, and the left third transmission gear 1632f are in mesh with each other. A columnar transmission shaft portion 1632h protruding forward from the left third transmission gear 1632f is formed in the vicinity of the outer peripheral end portion of the left third transmission gear 1632f. The transmission shaft portion 1632h is inserted through the long hole 1621b of the left movable body 1620.

  The cover member 1640 shown in FIG. 54 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1640 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The cover member 1640 is disposed in front of the movement control unit 1630 so as to cover the movement control unit 1630 from the front. Cover member 1640 is fixed to base member 1610. A part of the front surface of the cover member 1640 is appropriately decorated.

  The first movable body 1600 configured as described above is configured as a single movable body that can be moved in the vertical direction by a movement control means described later. The vertical movement of the first movable body 1600 will be described in detail later.

  The first movable body 1600 can move (turn) the movable body 1620 by the movement control means 1630. Specifically, when the motor 1631 is driven and the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in the rear view as shown in FIG. 63, the right second transmission gear 1632c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view via the right first transmission gear 1632b. Rotate to. When the right second transmission gear 1632c rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632g formed in the right second transmission gear 1632c pushes down the long hole 1621b of the right movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the right movable body 1620 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the back, with the rotation shaft 1625 as the center.

  Further, when the output gear 1632a is rotated clockwise in the rear view, the third left transmission gear 1632f is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view via the left first transmission gear 1632d and the second left transmission gear 1632e. When the left third transmission gear 1632f rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1632h formed in the left third transmission gear 1632f pushes down the long hole of the left movable body 1620 downward. As a result, the left movable body 1620 rotates about the rotation shaft 1625 in the clockwise direction in the rear view.

  When the motor 1631 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, the output gear 1632a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back), the right movable body 1620 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the rear, The movable body 1620 can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back.

  Thus, the first movable body 1600 can simultaneously rotate the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 by driving the motor 1631. In the following, the position where the right movable body 1620 rotates to the maximum when viewed from the front and the left movable body 1620 rotates to the maximum when viewed from the front (clockwise pair of movable bodies 1620 The position rotated so as to spread (see FIGS. 54 and 60) is referred to as a standby position of the movable body 1620. Further, the position where the right movable body 1620 rotates to the maximum when viewed from the front and the left movable body 1620 rotates to the maximum when viewed from the front (when both the pair of left and right movable bodies 1620 are downward The position rotated so as to face (refer to FIGS. 64 and 68) is referred to as an effect position of the movable body 1620.

[Configuration of Second Movable Body 1700]
The second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 55, 57, 58, 59, and 65 is supported so as to be movable (rotatable) with respect to the base member 1500. The second movable body 1700 is disposed behind the base member 1500 by being attached to the other surface side (rear surface side) of the base member 1500. A pair of left and right movable bodies 1700 are provided with respect to the base member 1500. The left and right second movable bodies 1700 are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the left and right center of the base member 1500. Therefore, hereinafter, the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the right side will be specifically described, and the description of the configuration of the second movable body 1700 on the left side will be omitted as appropriate. The second movable body 1700 mainly includes a base member 1710, a substrate 1720, a light diffusion member 1730, a cover member 1740, and a rotation shaft 1750.

  A base member 1710 shown in FIGS. 57, 59, and 65 supports each member constituting the second movable body 1700. The base member 1710 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 1710 is formed in a horizontally long shape whose longitudinal direction is in the left-right direction. The base member 1710 mainly includes a cylindrical portion 1711 and a long hole 1712.

  The cylindrical portion 1711 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The cylindrical portion 1711 is formed near the right end portion of the base member 1710.

  The long hole 1712 penetrates the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The long hole 1712 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the base member 1710 (immediately lower right of the cylindrical portion 1711). The long hole 1712 is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance from the vicinity of the cylindrical portion 1711 toward the lower right side (the lower right end side of the base member 1710).

  A substrate 1720 shown in FIG. 65 is one on which electronic components (functional components) are mounted. The substrate 1720 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the substrate 1720 is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the base member 1710, and is formed in a shape that substantially follows the base member 1710. A plurality of LEDs 1721 are arranged on the front surface of the substrate 1720 with appropriate intervals. The substrate 1720 is fixed to the front surface of the base member 1710.

  The light diffusing member 1730 diffuses the light emitted from the LED 1721 as appropriate. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the light diffusion member 1730 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the substrate 1720. The light diffusing member 1730 is formed of a light-transmitting material. Appropriate irregularities are formed on the light diffusing member 1730 so that light transmitted through the light diffusing member 1730 is diffused. The light diffusing member 1730 is disposed in front of the substrate 1720 so as to cover the substrate 1720 from the front. The light diffusing member 1730 is fixed to the base member 1710.

  The cover member 1740 is appropriately decorated. The cover member 1740 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outer shape of the cover member 1740 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the base member 1710. The cover member 1740 is formed of a light-transmitting material. The cover member 1740 is disposed in front of the base member 1710 and the like so as to cover the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, and the light diffusion member 1730 from the front. Cover member 1740 is fixed to base member 1710.

  The rotation shaft 1750 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 59 is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotation shaft 1750 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 1711 of the base member 1710 with the axial direction directed in the front-rear direction. The front portion of the rotation shaft 1750 is inserted into the lower right portion of the base member 1500. In this way, the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750.

  The second movable body 1700 on the right side configured as described above is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the base member 1500 about the rotation shaft 1750. In addition, when the LED 1721 mounted on the substrate 1720 is turned on, the light from the LED 1721 is diffused by the light diffusion member 1730 and irradiated to the cover member 1740. Thereby, the decoration applied to the cover member 1740 can be made conspicuous.

  Similar to the second movable body 1700 on the right side, the second movable body 1700 on the left side is also rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1750. A rotation shaft 1750 that supports the second movable body 1700 on the left side is inserted into the lower left portion of the base member 1500.

[Configuration of Movement Control Unit 1800]
The movement control means 1800 shown in FIGS. 55, 57 and 66 controls the movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The movement control means 1800 is formed substantially symmetrically. Therefore, the configuration of the right half (right side) of the movement control unit 1800 will be specifically described below, and the description of the configuration of the left half (left side) of the movement control unit 1800 will be omitted as appropriate. The movement control means 1800 mainly includes a motor 1810 and a driving force transmission mechanism 1820.

  The motor 1810 shown in FIGS. 55 and 66 is a drive source for moving the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The motor 1810 is fixed to the upper right part of the base member 1500. The motor 1810 is arranged such that its output shaft (not shown) faces rearward.

  The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 transmits the driving force generated by the motor 1810 to the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 is appropriately supported by the base member 1500. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 mainly includes an output gear 1821, a first transmission gear 1822, a second transmission gear 1823, an arm 1824, a third transmission gear 1825, and a fourth transmission gear 1826.

  The output gear 1821 (see FIG. 57) extracts the driving force of the motor 1810. The output gear 1821 is fixed to the rear end portion of the output shaft of the motor 1810.

  The first transmission gear 1822 is disposed substantially to the left of the output gear 1821 and meshes with the output gear 1821.

  The second transmission gear 1823 is disposed substantially below the first transmission gear 1822 and meshes with the first transmission gear 1822. The second transmission gear 1823 mainly includes a transmission shaft portion 1823a.

  The transmission shaft portion 1823a is a substantially columnar member. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The transmission shaft portion 1823a is disposed at a position away from the center of the second transmission gear 1823 by a predetermined distance (an eccentric position) when viewed from the front. The rear end portion of the transmission shaft portion 1823a is fixed in a state of being inserted through the second transmission gear 1823.

  The arm 1824 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The arm 1824 is arranged with its longitudinal direction substantially in the left-right direction. The arm 1824 is disposed immediately in front of the second transmission gear 1823. The arm 1824 mainly includes a rotation shaft 1824a, a first long hole 1824b, a second long hole 1824c, and a gear portion 1824d.

  The rotation shaft 1824a is a substantially cylindrical member. The rotation shaft 1824a is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 1824a is disposed below the motor 1810 when viewed from the front. The rear end portion of the rotation shaft 1824a is fixed in a state of being inserted through the base member 1500. The front end portion of the rotation shaft 1824 a is inserted into one end portion (right end portion) of the arm 1824. In this way, the arm 1824 is rotatably supported with respect to the base member 1500 via the rotation shaft 1824a.

  The first long hole 1824b penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The first long hole 1824 b is formed at the center in the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. The first long hole 1824b is formed to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. The transmission shaft portion 1823a of the second transmission gear 1823 is inserted through the first long hole 1824b.

  The second long hole 1824c penetrates the arm 1824 in the front-rear direction. The second long hole 1824c is formed at the other end (left end) of the arm 1824. The second long hole 1824c is formed to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the arm 1824. The right connecting shaft 1612 of the base member 1610 is inserted through the second long hole 1824c.

  The gear portion 1824d is formed at one end (right end) of the arm 1824. The gear portion 1824d is formed so that its teeth are directed substantially downward. The teeth of the gear portion 1824d are formed so as to be arranged in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft 1824a in a front view.

  The third transmission gear 1825 is disposed substantially below the arm 1824 (gear portion 1824d) and meshes with the gear portion 1824d of the arm 1824.

  The fourth transmission gear 1826 is disposed substantially to the right of the third transmission gear 1825 and meshes with the third transmission gear 1825. The fourth transmission gear 1826 is inserted with the front end portion of the rotation shaft 1750 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side. In this way, the fourth transmission gear 1826 can rotate around the same axis line (rotating shaft 1750) as the second movable body 1700 on the right side. The fourth transmission gear 1826 mainly includes an arm portion 1826a and a connecting shaft 1826b.

  The arm portion 1826a is a substantially plate-shaped portion when the plate surface is directed in the front-rear direction. The arm portion 1826a is formed to extend from the center (rotating shaft 1750) of the fourth transmission gear 1826 toward the lower right when viewed from the front. The distal end portion (lower right lower end portion) of the arm portion 1826a is formed so as to overlap with the arcuate hole 1530 on the right side of the base member 1500 in a front view.

  The connecting shaft 1826b connects the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) and the second movable body 1700. The connecting shaft 1826b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The connecting shaft 1826b is arranged with the axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The front end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into the tip portion (lower right end portion) of the arm portion 1826a. A midway portion of the connecting shaft 1826 b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 1530 of the base member 1500. The rear end portion of the connecting shaft 1826b is inserted into a long hole 1712 formed in the base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 on the right side.

[Movement of first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700]
The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved by the movement control means 1800 configured as described above. Specifically, when the motor 1810 is driven and the output gear 1821 is rotated clockwise in the rear view (see FIG. 57), the second transmission gear 1823 is viewed in the front view through the first transmission gear 1822 (see FIG. 67). Rotates counterclockwise. When the second transmission gear 1823 rotates, the transmission shaft portion 1823a provided in the second transmission gear 1823 pushes down the first long hole 1824b of the arm 1824 downward. As a result, the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the rotation shaft 1824a.

  When the arm 1824 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the base member 1610 of the first movable body 1600 is pushed downward via the connecting shaft 1612. As a result, the first movable body 1600 moves downward (see FIGS. 67 to 70).

  Thus, the rotational force (rotational force) of the second transmission gear 1823 is converted into a linear (vertical) force by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c). Further, the force in the linear direction is transmitted to the first movable body 1600 by the arm 1824 (second elongated hole 1824c).

  Further, when the arm 1824 (the gear portion 1824d) rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the third transmission gear 1825. When the fourth transmission gear 1826 rotates, the second movable body 1700 on the right side connected to the fourth transmission gear 1826 (arm portion 1826a) via the connection shaft 1826b also rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (FIG. 67). To FIG. 70).

  Thus, by driving the motor 1810, the first movable body 1600 can be moved downward, and at the same time, the second movable body 1700 can be rotated counterclockwise in front view.

  When the motor 1810 is driven in the opposite direction (that is, when the output gear 1821 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back (see FIG. 57)), the first movable body 1600 is moved upward, contrary to the above, The second movable body 1700 on the right side can be rotated clockwise in front view.

  Here, a motor 1631 is provided on the back surface of the first movable body 1600 (base member 1610), but the base member 1500 disposed behind the first movable body 1600 interferes with the motor 1631. An opening 1510 is formed so as to avoid this. For this reason, even if the 1st movable body 1600 is moved up and down, the motor 1631 and the base member 1500 do not contact.

  In the above description, the operation of the right half of the movement control means 1800 has been described, but the same applies to the operation of the left half. That is, by simultaneously driving the left and right motors 1810, the first movable body 1600 is moved up and down, and at the same time, the left and right second movable bodies 1700 are rotated (that is, the right second movable body 1700 is viewed from the front). The second movable body 1700 on the left side can be rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

  In the following, the position of the first movable body 1600 in the state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the position where the first movable body 1600 is raised to the maximum) (FIGS. 54, 55 and 66). (Refer to the standby position of the first movable body 1600). In addition, the position of the first movable body 1600 (the position where the first movable body 1600 is lowered to the maximum) in a state where the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 67 to 70). This is referred to as the effect position of the first movable body 1600.

  When the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, most of the first movable body 1600 is located behind (behind) the game board 17 and the stage 42, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first movable body 1600. A state is reached (see FIG. 3). When the first movable body 1600 is in the production position, most of the first movable body 1600 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is easily visible to the player.

  Further, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state in which the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front (the second movable body 1700 on the right side is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and The position at which the two movable bodies 1700 are rotated to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIGS. 54, 55, and 66) is referred to as a standby position of the second movable body 1700. Further, the position of the second movable body 1700 in a state in which the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated counterclockwise to the maximum when viewed from the front (the second movable body 1700 on the right side rotates to the maximum counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the left side The position where the second movable body 1700 is rotated to the maximum in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) (see FIGS. 67 to 70) is referred to as the effect position of the second movable body 1700.

  When the second movable body 1700 is in the standby position, since the substantially entire second movable body 1700 is located behind the base member 1500, the second movable body 1700 is hardly visible to the player. In addition, when the second movable body 1700 is in the effect position, the second movable body 1700 is in a state where it is easy for the player to visually recognize since the substantially entire body is located below the base member 1500.

  The movement control means 1800 moves the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 (the standby position (see FIG. 55) and the production position (see FIG. 68) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700). And movement of the movable body 1620 provided in the first movable body 1600 (movement between the standby position of the movable body 1620 (see FIG. 60) and the effect position (see FIG. 64)) Each can be done independently. That is, the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the standby position or the effect position regardless of the position (standby position or effect position) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. Is possible. 69 and 70 illustrate a state in which the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the effect position, and the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 is in the effect position.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 59, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the standby position, and the first movable body 1600 is accommodated in front of the base member 1500 (front side). In addition, by accommodating the second movable body 1700 immediately behind (on the rear surface side) of the base member 1500, the entire second movable accessory unit 82 can be formed compactly. Therefore, when transporting the second movable accessory unit 82, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are accommodated in the standby position, so that space saving during transportation can be achieved. .

  When the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the first movable body 1600 is in front of the base member 1500 (player side), and the second movable body 1700 is the base member 1500. They are arranged behind (inside the pachinko gaming machine 1). For this reason, the distance (front-rear direction distance) between the 1st movable body 1600 and the 2nd movable body 1700 can be ensured, and even if an impact is applied to the second movable accessory unit 82 during transportation, etc. The occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are in the standby position, the base member 1500 is disposed between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700. The occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be more effectively suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 to 71, the first movable body 1600 is more forward than the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction even when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are moved to the effect position. The second movable body 1700 is disposed rearward of the base member 1500. As described above, since the members (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) that are movable with respect to the base member 1500 are arranged separately before and after the base member 1500, the second movable accessory The center of gravity of the entire unit 82 is located in a portion close to the base member 1500 (inside the base member or a portion close to the base member). Therefore, the moment of inertia generated when the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are actuated (moved) can be reduced, and the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be swung (vibrated, etc.) ) Can be suppressed. Thereby, the occurrence of contact between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 are disposed substantially symmetrically with the first movable body 1600 interposed therebetween in front view. For this reason, the center of gravity of the second movable accessory unit 82 as a whole is located in the vicinity of the center of the left and right of the second movable accessory unit 82, and more effectively the first movable body 1600 and the second movable accessory unit 82. Oscillation (vibration or the like) of the body 1700 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the motor 1631 of the first movable body 1600 is disposed at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction (for example, in the opening 1510 of the base member 1500 when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position). (See FIG. 59 and the like). As described above, the motor 1631 which is a relatively heavy member in the first movable body 1600 is arranged at a position overlapping the base member 1500 in the front-rear direction, so that the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is based. It becomes easy to be located in the part near the member 1500. Thereby, the swinging (vibration or the like) of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be more effectively suppressed.

[Holding of first movable body 1600 by movement control means 1800]
Below, the structure of the movement control means 1800 for hold | maintaining the 1st movable body 1600 in a standby position is demonstrated in detail.

  Since the first movable body 1600 is always subjected to its own weight (force to move downward), the movement control means 1800 does not move the first movable body 1600 unintentionally to a predetermined position (particularly, In this embodiment, it is configured to be held at the standby position). 72 to 74, in order to facilitate understanding of the configuration for holding the first movable body 1600 in the standby position, a part of the movement control means 1800 (second transmission gear 1823 and arm 1824) and the first movable body are shown. A schematic diagram of a body 1600 is shown.

  In the following description with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the transmission shaft portion provided in the second transmission gear 1823 for easy understanding of the state of rotation (rotational position) of the second transmission gear 1823. Description will be made by paying attention to the rotational position of 1823a.

  As shown in FIG. 72, when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position, the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated clockwise to a predetermined position when viewed from the front. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position A. The rotation position A is a position on the upper right side of the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 in a front view. In this state, the transmission shaft portion 1823 a is in contact with one end (right end) of the first long hole 1824 b of the arm 1824.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front when the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (see FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a reaches a certain rotational position. Sometimes, the center line of the first long hole 1824b (arm 1824) (a straight line connecting the central points in the width direction (short direction) of the first long hole 1824b) L is the rotation locus of the transmission shaft portion 1823a in front view. It touches the circle R along The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position B. In this state, the first movable body 1600 is located at a position higher than the standby position (the highest position in the movable range of the first movable body 1600).

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the second transmission gear 1823 further rotates counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 73, the first movable body 1600 can be moved to the effect position. The position of the transmission shaft portion 1823a at this time is referred to as a rotational position C. The rotational position C is a position substantially below the center (rotation axis) of the second transmission gear 1823 in a front view.

  In a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in a range (angle range X) between the rotational position A and the rotational position B, the second movable gear 1823 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, The body 1600 will move downward. In a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angle range X, the first transmission body 1600 moves upward by the second transmission gear 1823 rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  In a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is located in a range (angle range Y) between the rotation position B and the rotation position C, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, whereby the first movable The body 1600 will move upward. Further, in a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angle range Y, the first movable body 1600 moves downward as the second transmission gear 1823 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  In the movement control means 1800 configured as described above, a force that rotates counterclockwise in front view is always applied to the arm 1824 by the weight of the first movable body 1600. As shown in FIG. 72, in a state where the transmission shaft portion 1823a is positioned in the angle range X, when the arm 1824 attempts to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second transmission gear 1823 is connected to the second transmission gear 1823 via the transmission shaft portion 1823a. A force is applied to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front. However, in the state where the first movable body 1600 is in the standby position (the state shown in FIG. 72), the transmission shaft portion 1823a is in contact with the right end of the first long hole 1824b of the arm 1824. Can not rotate any more. That is, even if a force due to the weight of the first movable body 1600 is applied to the arm 1824, the arm 1824 and the second transmission gear 1823 do not rotate, and the first movable body 1600 is held at the standby position.

  In this way, the second transmission gear 1823 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, and the transmission shaft 1823a and the right end of the first long hole 1824b are located at a position where the transmission shaft 1823a exceeds the rotation position B (rotation position A). Are brought into contact with each other and the state is set as the standby position of the first movable body 1600, so that the first movable body 1600 can be held so as not to move downward due to its own weight. In this case, since the driving force of the motor 1810 is not required to hold the first movable body 1600, power is not wasted and the life of the motor 1810 is not shortened unnecessarily.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the gaming machine.
The first movable body 1600 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the first movable body.
Moreover, the 2nd movable body 1700 which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of a 2nd movable body.
Moreover, the 1st movable body 1600 which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of a movable body.
Further, the motor 1810 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the driving means.
Moreover, the 2nd transmission gear 1823 which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of a rotary body.
Further, the arm 1824 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of a conversion mechanism and a reciprocating motion transmitting means.
Moreover, the 1st long hole 1824b which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of a movement control means.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the single first movable body 1600 is attached to one surface side of the base member 1500 and the pair of second movable bodies 1700 are attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500. The number of (first movable body 1600 and second movable body 1700) is not limited to this. That is, a plurality of first movable bodies 1600 can be attached to the base member 1500, or a single body or three or more second movable bodies 1700 can be attached to the base member 1500.

  In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted from rotating in the clockwise direction in front view beyond the angle range X by the first long hole 1824b formed in the arm 1824 (FIG. 66), the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 may be restricted by other configurations. For example, the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 can be regulated by separately providing a regulating member that can come into contact with the transmission shaft portion 1823 a provided in the second transmission gear 1823.

[Configuration related to wiring]
Below, the structure regarding the wiring of a movable body (The movable body 1620 of the 1st movable body 1600 and the 2nd movable body 1700) is demonstrated.

  The movable body 1620 and the second movable body 1700 of the first movable body 1600 each have a substrate (substrate 1622 and substrate 1720) on which LEDs are mounted, and it is necessary to supply power to the substrate via a wiring member. There is. However, when the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700 is assembled, the wiring member is not properly connected to the substrate, or the wiring member is dropped from the substrate due to the movement of the movable body 1620 or the second movable body 1700. In such a case, problems such as the inability to supply power to the substrate occur. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration for suppressing the occurrence of such problems. This will be specifically described below.

  First, the configuration related to the wiring of the second movable body 1700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 80. 75 and 76, the light diffusion member 1730 and the cover member 1740 are not shown for convenience. In addition, in FIG. 77, the flat cable 1770 described later is omitted for convenience. 77 and 78, the light diffusing member 1730 is not shown for convenience.

  The second movable body 1700 includes a connector 1760 and a flat cable 1770 in addition to the base member 1710, the substrate 1720, the light diffusing member 1730, the cover member 1740, and the rotating shaft 1750 described above.

  A connector 1760 shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 takes in electric power to the board 1720. The connector 1760 is provided in the upper right part of the front surface of the substrate 1720. The connector 1760 is connected to the LED 1721 provided on the substrate 1720 and can supply power to the LED 1721. The connector 1760 is arranged with a connection portion into which a wiring member (a flat cable 1770 described later in the present embodiment) can be inserted and fixed substantially upward in a front view. The connector 1760 is connected to the flat cable 1770 by inserting the flat cable 1770 into the connection portion.

  The flat cable 1770 shown in FIG. 76 and FIGS. 78 to 80 is a member that conducts electric power. The flat cable 1770 is formed in a sheet shape whose length in the width direction (width) is shorter than the length in the length direction. The thickness of the flat cable 1770 is formed sufficiently small with respect to the width. The flat cable 1770 has flexibility (a flexible flat cable (FFC) is preferable). In FIG. 80, only the vicinity of one end of the flat cable 1770 (the end connected to the connector 1760) is shown, but the other end is also configured in a similar manner, so that the other end The illustration of the part is omitted. The flat cable 1770 mainly includes a power line 1771, an insulator 1772, and a reinforcing sheet 1773.

  The power supply line 1771 is a portion where power is conducted. The power supply line 1771 is formed of a conductor. A plurality of power supply lines 1771 are arranged so as to be substantially parallel to each other. The plurality of power supply lines 1771 include power supply lines 1771 to which different voltages are applied. As described above, the power of the voltage corresponding to the purpose can be conducted by the plurality of power supply lines 1771.

  The insulator 1772 covers the power supply line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed in a sheet shape covering substantially the entire power line 1771. The insulator 1772 is formed so as to expose one end portion of the power supply line 1771 from one side surface side.

  The reinforcing sheet 1773 reinforces the end of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is provided on the other side of one end of the insulator 1772 (the side opposite to the side where the power supply line 1771 is exposed). The reinforcing sheet 1773 is formed to have a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the other side surface of the insulator 1772. The reinforcing sheet 1773 is colored differently from the insulator 1772. Thereby, the reinforcing sheet 1773 and the insulator 1772 can be easily distinguished from each other.

  A base member 1710 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 75 to 79 includes an outer edge portion 1713 and a guide portion 1714 in addition to the cylindrical portion 1711 and the long hole 1712 described above.

  The outer edge portion 1713 is a portion that is formed (stands up) so as to extend forward from the base member 1710. The outer edge portion 1713 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the base member 1710. A concave portion 1713 a is formed in the outer edge portion 1713.

The concave portion 1713a is a portion formed by the front end surface of the outer edge portion 1713 being recessed rearward. The concave portion 1713a is formed in the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1713. More specifically, the concave portion 1713a is formed in a portion facing the upper end surface (connecting portion) of the connector 1760 in a front view. Concave portion 1713a is formed to be linear along outer edge portion 1713 in a front view. The recess 1713a is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The recess 1713a is formed to have a substantially arc shape in cross-sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

  The guide portion 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 so as to follow a normal wiring path. The guide part 1714 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape. A pair of guide portions 1714 are provided on the upper right portion of the base member 1710 so as to face each other. The pair of guide portions 1714 are arranged so as to sandwich the concave portion 1713a therebetween. The distance between the pair of guide portions 1714 is formed to be substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770. The guide portion 1714 is disposed so as to extend from the outer edge portion 1713 toward the inside of the base member 1710 (connector 1760) in a front view. The width (height) of the guide portion 1714 in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the width in the front-rear direction of the outer edge portion 1713 with which the guide portion 1714 is adjacent. That is, the front end portion of the guide portion 1714 protrudes forward from the front end portion of the outer edge portion 1713.

  The substrate 1720 includes a reference line 1722 in addition to the LED 1721 described above.

  A reference line 1722 shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 is a guide for the position of the flat cable 1770. The reference line 1722 is formed by performing appropriate printing on the front surface of the substrate 1720. The reference line 1722 is formed substantially above the connector 1760 on the front surface of the substrate 1720. The reference line 1722 is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper end surface (connecting portion) of the connector 1760.

  The cover member 1740 of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 includes an outer edge portion 1741.

  The outer edge portion 1741 is a portion that is formed (erected) so as to extend rearward from the cover member 1740. The outer edge portion 1741 is formed substantially along the outer shape of the cover member 1740. A convex portion 1741 a is formed on the outer edge portion 1741.

  The convex portion 1741a is a portion formed by projecting the rear end surface of the outer edge portion 1741 rearward. The convex portion 1741 a is formed on the upper right portion of the outer edge portion 1741. More specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a portion facing the concave portion 1713a formed in the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The convex portion 1741a is formed to have a length substantially the same as the width of the flat cable 1770, similarly to the concave portion 1713a. The convex portion 1741a is formed to have a substantially arc shape in cross-sectional view (see FIGS. 77 to 79).

  Here, the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a are formed to have curved surfaces having different shapes in a cross-sectional view (see FIG. 79). Specifically, the convex portion 1741a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the concave portion 1713a (can enter the concave portion 1713a) when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710. Further, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, the convex portion 1741a comes closest to the concave portion 1713a at two locations (D portion and E portion in FIG. 79) in the sectional view (in this embodiment). ). The portion D is a portion on the inner side of the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741 (the left-right direction in FIG. 79). Further, the E portion is a portion outside the tip of the convex portion 1741a in the thickness direction of the outer edge portion 1741.

  Below, the assembly method of the 2nd movable body 1700, especially the method of connecting the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 correctly is demonstrated.

  When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 and connected, the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 and the reference line 1722 of the board 1720 are referred to to check whether the flat cable 1770 is correctly connected to the connector 1760. be able to.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 of the flat cable 1770 coincides with the reference line 1722 in the front view with the flat cable 1770 accurately connected to the connector 1760 in advance (overlapping). ), The printing position of the reference line 1722 is adjusted. Therefore, the operator can work accurately by attaching the flat cable 1770 to the connector 1760 so that the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 coincides with the reference line 1722.

  If the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in an inclined state, the end of the reinforcing sheet 1773 does not coincide with the reference line 1722 as shown in FIG. You can see that the connection is incorrect.

  Further, when the flat cable 1770 is accurately connected to the connector 1760, the flat cable 1770 is disposed so as to extend from the connector 1760 toward the guide portion 1714. The flat cable 1770 is guided by a pair of guide portions 1714. Specifically, the flat cable 1770 is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the guide portions 1714 from both sides in the width direction. For this reason, even if the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, one of the pair of guide portions 1714 comes into contact with the flat cable 1770 and the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction is restricted. In this manner, the flat cable 1770 is guided by the guide portion 1714 so as to follow a normal wiring path.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second movable body 1700 moves (turns) around a turning shaft 1750 extending in the front-rear direction. That is, the second movable body 1700 moves on a plane parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770. Therefore, a force along a direction (for example, the width direction) parallel to the surface of the flat cable 1770 is easily applied to the flat cable 1770. However, in the present embodiment, by disposing the guide portions 1714 on both sides of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction, the movement of the flat cable 1770 in the width direction can be effectively restricted.

  The direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 guide the flat cable 1770 is formed to be the same as the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is accurately inserted into the connector 1760. That is, the connection portion of the connector 1760 is arranged on an extension line in the direction in which the pair of guide portions 1714 extend in the front view. Therefore, if the flat cable 1770 is connected to the connector 1760 in an inclined state, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 as shown in FIG. You can see that the connection is incorrect.

  The flat cable 1770 may be inserted into the connector 1760 after the substrate 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710 or may be inserted into the connector 1760 before the substrate 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710. When the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 after the substrate 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 interferes with the guide portion 1714 unless the flat cable 1770 is inserted accurately (so as not to tilt). Thus, it can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is inaccurate. In addition, when the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 before the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710, the flat cable 1770 is fixed when the board 1720 is fixed to the base member 1710. Since it interferes with the guide portion 1714, it can be seen that the connection of the flat cable 1770 is inaccurate at a glance.

  Further, after the flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted into the connector 1760, the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710 from the front as shown in FIGS. 77 to 79. Specifically, the outer edge portion 1713 of the base member 1710 and the outer edge portion 1741 of the cover member 1740 are abutted and fixed in contact with each other. In this way, a box-shaped member is formed by the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740. The space formed inside the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 accommodates the vicinity of the end portions (end portions on the connector 1760 side) of the substrate 1720, the connector 1760, and the flat cable 1770.

  Here, when the cover member 1740 is fixed to the base member 1710, as shown in FIG. 79, a predetermined butting portion (specifically, the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710). A flat cable 1770 is sandwiched and fixed. Here, the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a are formed in a substantially arc shape. For this reason, the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a in a state of being bent along the convex portion 1741a and the concave portion 1713a.

  In this manner, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held with respect to the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 by sandwiching and fixing the bent portion of the flat cable 1770. Accordingly, even when the second movable body 1700 moves, the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from moving relative to the base member 1710, and as a result, the flat cable 1770 can be prevented from falling off the connector 1760. .

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, the flat cable 1770 can be held at two places (part D and part E). For this reason, the flat cable 1770 can be held more firmly than in the case of being clamped at one place. In addition, since the portions (convex portion 1741a and concave portion 1713a) sandwiching the flat cable 1770 are formed in a curved surface, an excessive load is hardly applied to the flat cable 1770, and the flat cable 1770 is damaged or disconnected in the portion. Can be suppressed.

  Note that the shape of the abutting portion for sandwiching the flat cable 1770 (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710) is not limited to that shown in FIG. Below, the modification of the said matching part is demonstrated using FIG.

  In the modified example (first modified example) shown in FIG. 83 (a), a convex portion 1741b is formed in the cover member 1740, and a concave portion 1713b is formed in the base member 1710. The convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710 is formed to have the same shape (substantially trapezoidal shape) as the convex portion 1741b in a sectional view.

  In the butt portion thus configured (the convex portion 1741b of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713b of the base member 1710), the flat cable 1770 can be held between substantially the entire surface of the convex portion 1741b and the concave portion 1713b. Thereby, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed.

  In the modified example (second modified example) shown in FIG. 83B, a convex portion 1741 c is formed on the cover member 1740, and a concave portion 1713 c is formed on the base member 1710. The convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710 is formed to have a substantially trapezoidal shape (isosceles trapezoidal shape) in a cross-sectional view. The trapezoidal leg of the convex part 1741c and the trapezoidal leg of the concave part 1713c (legs facing each other) are formed to be parallel to each other. The bottom side of the trapezoidal rear side of the concave portion 1713c (side of the bottom portion of the concave portion 1713c) is formed to be shorter than the bottom side of the convex side of the trapezoid 1741c (side of the tip side of the convex portion 1741c).

  In the butt portion thus configured (the convex portion 1741c of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713c of the base member 1710), the flat cable 1770 is sandwiched between the inclined surfaces (trapezoidal legs) of the convex portion 1741c and the concave portion 1713c. Can do. At this time, a gap is formed between the tip portion of the convex portion 1741c and the bottom portion of the concave portion 1713c. Therefore, the flat cable 1770 can be gently bent in the gap.

  In such a second modification, it is difficult for an excessive load to be applied to the flat cable 1770 by the corners (trapezoidal apex portions) of the convex portions 1741c and the concave portions 1713c, and the occurrence of damage or disconnection of the flat cable 1770 is suppressed. be able to.

  In the modified example (third modified example) shown in FIG. 83 (c), the cover member 1740 is formed with an uneven portion 1741d, and the base member 1710 is formed with an uneven portion 1713d. The uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 is formed to have a wave shape in a cross-sectional view. The uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710 is formed to have the same shape (wave shape) as the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 in a cross-sectional view.

  In the butt portion thus configured (the uneven portion 1741d of the cover member 1740 and the uneven portion 1713d of the base member 1710), the flat cable 1770 can be sandwiched between substantially the entire surface of the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d. Thereby, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly fixed. Further, since the uneven portion 1741d and the uneven portion 1713d are formed in a curved shape having no corners, an excessive load is not easily applied to the flat cable 1770, and the occurrence of damage or disconnection of the flat cable 1770 can be suppressed. .

  Next, the configuration relating to the wiring of the movable body 1620 of the first movable body 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The movable body 1620 includes a connector 1626 and a flat cable 1627 in addition to the base member 1621, the substrate 1622, the light diffusion member 1623, the cover member 1624, and the rotating shaft 1625 described above.

  The connector 1626 shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 86 takes in electric power to the board 1622. The connector 1626 is provided on the upper left portion of the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The connector 1626 is connected to an LED 1622a provided on the substrate 1622 and can supply electric power to the LED 1622a. The connector 1626 is arranged with a connecting portion into which a wiring member (in the present embodiment, a flat cable 1627 described later) can be inserted and fixed facing substantially upward in the rear view. The connector 1626 is connected to the flat cable 1627 by inserting the flat cable 1627 into the connection portion.

  A flat cable 1627 shown in FIG. 85 is a member that conducts electric power. Similar to the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, the flat cable 1627 includes a power line (not shown), an insulator 1627b, and a reinforcing sheet 1627c. The flat cable 1627 has substantially the same configuration as the flat cable 1770 of the second movable body 1700, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  A substrate 1622 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 includes a reference line 1622b in addition to the above-described LED 1622a.

  The reference line 1622b is a guide for the position of the flat cable 1627. The reference line 1622b is formed by performing appropriate printing on the rear surface of the substrate 1622. The reference line 1622b is formed on the rear surface of the board 1622 substantially at the upper left of the connector 1626. The reference line 1622b is formed in a straight line parallel to the upper left end surface (connection portion) of the connector 1626.

  The base member 1621 of the movable body 1620 shown in FIGS. 84 and 86 includes an opening 1621c in addition to the cylindrical portion 1621a and the long hole 1621b described above.

  The opening 1621c shown in FIG. 86 is a part formed so as to penetrate the base member 1621 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1621 c is formed in the upper left part of the base member 1621. Specifically, the opening 1621c is formed at a position facing the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b provided on the substrate 1622 when the substrate 1622 is attached to the base member 1621. The opening 1621c is formed in such a size and shape that the connector 1626 and the reference line 1622b can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear via the opening 1621c. In the present embodiment, the opening 1621c is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the connector 1626 in the rear view.

  Hereinafter, a method for assembling the movable body 1620, particularly a method for accurately connecting the flat cable 1627 to the connector 1626 will be described.

  When the flat cable 1627 is inserted and connected to the connector 1626, the flat cable 1627 is accurately connected to the connector 1626 with reference to the reinforcing sheet 1627c of the flat cable 1627 and the reference line 1622b of the board 1622 as shown in FIG. You can check if it is connected.

  Further, after the flat cable 1627 is accurately inserted into the connector 1626, the substrate 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621 as shown in FIGS. In this state, the connector 1626 is arranged to face the opening 1621c of the base member 1621. Accordingly, a portion where the flat cable 1627 is inserted into the connector 1626 can be confirmed from the rear of the base member 1621 through the opening 1621c. Therefore, after the board 1622 is fixed to the base member 1621, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the flat cable 1627 is correctly inserted into the connector 1626.

  In the above description, the opening 1621c is provided in the movable body 1620 and the flat cable 1627 is visible (see FIG. 86). Similarly, the opening (described later) is provided in the second movable body 1700. It is also possible to provide a portion 1715). Below, the 2nd movable body 1700 (the modification of the 2nd movable body 1700) which has the said opening part 1715 is demonstrated using FIG.

  In the modification of the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87, the connector 1760 and the reference line 1722 are provided in the upper right part of the rear surface of the substrate 1720.

  In the modification of the second movable body 1700, an opening 1715 is formed in the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is a part formed so as to penetrate the base member 1710 in the front-rear direction. The opening 1715 is formed in the upper right part of the base member 1710. Specifically, the opening 1715 is formed at a position facing the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide portion 1714 provided on the substrate 1720 when the substrate 1720 is attached to the base member 1710. The opening 1715 is formed in such a size and shape that the connector 1760, the reference line 1722, and the guide 1717 can be sufficiently visually recognized from the rear through the opening 1715. In the present embodiment, the opening 1715 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is slightly larger than the connector 1760 in the rear view.

  In the second movable body 1700 configured as described above, the portion where the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760 or the state where the flat cable 1770 is guided by the guide portion 1714 is viewed from the rear of the base member 1710 via the opening portion 1715. Can be confirmed. Therefore, even after the substrate 1720, the cover member 1740, and the like are fixed to the base member 1710, whether the flat cable 1770 is correctly inserted into the connector 1760 and whether the flat cable 1770 follows a normal wiring path. It can be easily confirmed.

  In FIG. 87, a modified example in which the opening 1715 is applied to the second movable body 1700 is shown. However, in addition to the above, a guide section (guide section) provided on the second movable body 1700 is provided on the movable body 1620. 1714) (see FIG. 81) or a butting portion (convex portion 1741a and concave portion 1713a) (see FIG. 79) can be provided.

The LED 1721 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of an electronic component.
Further, the base member 1710 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the direction defining means.
Moreover, the base member 1710 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the first member.
Moreover, the cover member 1740 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second member.
Moreover, the flat cable 1770 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of a wiring member.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in this embodiment, power is supplied to the LED 1721 by the flat cable 1770, but the present invention is not limited to this, and power may be supplied to other electronic components. .

  In the present embodiment, the guide portion 1714 is provided on the base member 1710. However, the guide portion 1714 may be provided on another member (for example, the cover member 1740).

  Further, the flat cable 1770 need not always be in contact with the guide portion 1714. For example, normally (a state in which the second movable body 1700 is not moving) may be disposed so as to pass between the pair of guide portions 1714 without contacting the pair of guide portions 1714. Even in such a configuration, when the flat cable 1770 tries to move in the width direction, the flat cable 1770 comes into contact with one of the pair of guide portions 1714, and the movement of the flat cable 1770 can be restricted. it can.

  Further, in the present embodiment, some shapes of the abutting portions sandwiching the flat cable 1770 are exemplified (see FIGS. 79 and 83), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the flat cable 1770 is bent. Any shape can be used as long as the shape can be fixed by the screw.

  Further, in the present embodiment (for example, the second movable body 1700 shown in FIG. 87), the connector 1760 and the flat cable 1627 provided on the rear surface of the board 1720 are arranged behind the board 1720 so as to be visible. Although the opening 1715 is provided in the base member 1710, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the connector 1760 is provided on the front surface of the substrate 1720, an appropriate opening is provided in the light diffusion member 1730 or the cover member 1740 disposed in front of the substrate 1720 so that the connector 1760 can be viewed from the front. It is also possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the reference line 1622b and the reference line 1722, which are references for the positions of the flat cable 1627 and the flat cable 1770, are formed by performing appropriate printing on the substrate 1622 and the substrate 1720. For example, instead of printing, a reference member may be attached to the substrate 1622 and the substrate 1720.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the flat cable 1770 was illustrated as a wiring member, it is also possible to use other various wiring members.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a pachislot gaming machine, for example.

  Below, the structure of the production | presentation apparatus 2400 which concerns on 1st embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit is demonstrated in detail.

  The rendering device 2400 shown in FIG. 88 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-like accessory (a drum main body 2420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, the rendering device 2400 includes a mounting base 2410, a drum main body 2420, a light emitting unit 2430, and a drive transmission mechanism 2440.

  The mounting base 2410 supports a drum main body 2420 and the like which will be described later. The mounting base 2410 includes a housing member 2411, a right receiving member 2412, a left receiving member 2413, and a shaft member 2414.

  The housing member 2411 is for housing the drum body 2420 and the like. The housing member 2411 is formed in a substantially bottomed cylindrical shape with its axial direction facing the left-right direction. The housing member 2411 has a bottom surface disposed on the right side, and has a left portion and a front portion opened. The housing member 2411 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via the decorative member or the like of the effect device 2400.

  The right receiving member 2412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 2420. The right receiving member 2412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 2412 is formed so that the outer diameter thereof can be accommodated in the accommodating member 2411. The right receiving member 2412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the housing member 2411 with a screw and is housed in the housing member 2411.

  The left receiving member 2413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum body 2420. The left receiving member 2413 is formed in a substantially plate shape with its plate surface facing in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 2413 is formed such that its front-rear width is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the housing member 2411. Further, the left receiving member 2413 is formed so that the vertical width thereof is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 2411. The left receiving member 2413 has a lower portion of the right side surface that is recessed leftward except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left receiving member 2413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 2411 with a screw. The left receiving member 2413 includes an outer protrusion 2413a and an inner protrusion 2413b.

  The outer projecting portion 2413a is formed in the lower portion (the recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413. The outer protrusion 2413a protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 2413. The outer protrusion 2413a is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side.

  The inner protrusion 2413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 2413a. The inner protrusion 2413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. Further, the inner protruding portion 2413b has an inner edge portion formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the shaft member 2414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the inner protruding portion 2413b. The right end of the shaft member 2414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 2411 and the right receiving member 2412. The shaft member 2414 supports a light emitting unit 2430 to be described later via a connecting member 2414a attached to the left and right middle part.

  The drum main body 2420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIGS. 91 to 93, the drum body 2420 includes a base member 2421, a reel sheet 2422, a left attachment member 2423 and a right attachment member 2424.

  The base member 2421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 2422 to be described later. The base member 2421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. The base member 2421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end portion toward the left end portion. The base member 2421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof can be accommodated in the accommodation member 2411 (see FIG. 88). The base member 2421 has its left portion closed and its right portion opened. The base member 2421 is formed of a transparent resin material and configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, the base member 2421 includes a first protrusion 2421a, a second protrusion 2421b, a third protrusion 2421c, a through hole 2421d, and an engagement hole 2421e.

  The first protrusion 2421 a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421. The first projecting portion 2421 a is disposed at the left end portion of the base member 2421 and is formed continuously with the bottom surface of the base member 2421. Thus, the first protrusion 2421a is formed so as to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 2421. The first protrusion 2421a is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape when viewed from the side. The first projecting portion 2421a is formed at the rear end portion of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position at 3 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 94).

  The second protrusion 2421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 2421a. The second projecting portion 2421b is arranged at an interval in the circumferential direction of the base member 2421 with respect to the first projecting portion 2421a. The second protrusion 2421b is formed at the front upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position between 10:00 and 11:00 of the timepiece in FIG. 94).

  The third protrusion 2421c is formed to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second protrusion 2421b with respect to the center of the upper and lower sides of the base member 2421. The third protrusion 2421c is formed at the front lower part of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 94).

  The through hole 2421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in side view. The through hole 2421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted. The through hole 2421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 2421 in the left-right direction.

  The engagement hole 2421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 2421. The engagement hole 2421e penetrates the base member 2421 from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface in the radial direction. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of the engagement holes 2421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the base member 2421 configured in this manner is attached to the housing member 2411 via a left attachment member 2423 and the like which will be described later. Thereby, the base member 2421 is accommodated in the accommodating member 2411, and it is comprised so that a player can visually recognize from the front. As shown in FIG. 89, the shaft member 2414 is inserted through the through hole 2421d of the base member 2421. The base member 2421 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the reel sheet 2422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually recognize the game effect. In the present embodiment, as the symbol C, a plurality of symbols such as a numeric symbol “111” and a character symbol “HIT” are employed. Further, the symbol C is appropriately omitted in the drawings excluding the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 92, 93 and 98) in order to make the other members easy to see.
The reel sheet 2422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel sheet 2422 is formed so that its outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 2421. The reel sheet 2422 is formed such that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 2421. The reel sheet 2422 is coated with a light-transmitting paint on a portion corresponding to the pattern C on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is coated with a light-transmitting (shielding) paint on the other portions. Accordingly, the reel sheet 2422 is configured to transmit light in a portion where the pattern C is printed and is configured to transmit light in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 93 and 95, the reel sheet 2422 includes a first notch portion 2422a, a second notch portion 2422b, a third notch portion 2422c, and an overlapping portion 2422d.

  The first notch portion 2422 a is formed at the left rear end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The first notch 2422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch portion 2422 a corresponds to the first protrusion 2421 a of the base member 2421. That is, the first cutout portion 2422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion portion 2421a.

  The second notch portion 2422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch portion 2422a. The second notch portion 2422b is disposed with a space in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the first notch portion 2422a. The second notch portion 2422 b is formed at the front upper portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The second notch 2422b corresponds to the second protrusion 2421b. In other words, the second notch portion 2422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion portion 2421b.

  The third cutout portion 2422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second cutout portion 2422b with respect to the upper and lower central portions of the reel sheet 2422. The third notch portion 2422 c is formed at the front lower portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422. The third notch 2422c corresponds to the third protrusion 2421c. In other words, the third cutout portion 2422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion portion 2421c.

  The distance L1a in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95 from the first notch portion 2422a to the second notch portion 2422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 95 from the second notch portion 2422b to the third notch portion 2422c. It is formed to be longer than the distance L2a.

  The overlapping portion 2422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheet 2422 overlaps in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed from the left end portion of the reel sheet 2422 to the right end portion. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. The overlapping portion 2422d is formed in a portion where the first notch portion 2422a, the second notch portion 2422b, and the third notch portion 2422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 2422d according to the present embodiment is formed in the upper rear portion of the reel sheet 2422.

  The reel sheet 2422 configured as described above is accommodated in the base member 2421 as shown in FIGS. 93 and 96. At this time, the first notch portion 2422a engages with the first protrusion 2421a. The second notch 2422b is engaged with the second protrusion 2421b. Further, the third notch portion 2422c is engaged with the third protrusion portion 2421c. As described above, the reel sheet 2422 is configured such that the symbol C is disposed at a specific position of the base member 2421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 2421. The symbol C of the reel sheet 2422 is visible from the outside of the base member 2421 in a state where the reel sheet 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2421.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the left mounting member 2423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 2421. The left mounting member 2423 includes a recess 2423a and a through hole 2423b.

  The recess 2423a is a substantially circular recess in a side view formed on the left side surface of the left mounting member 2423. The recess 2423a is formed to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protrusion 2413a of the left receiving member 2413 (see FIG. 97).

  The through hole 2423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left mounting member 2423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 2423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 2414 can be inserted.

  The left mounting member 2423 configured as described above is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 2421 with a screw. Accordingly, the left attachment member 2423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the left mounting member 2423 is supported by the left receiving member 2413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the recess 2423a to the outer protruding portion 2413a of the left receiving member 2413. Further, the shaft member 2414 is inserted into the through hole 2423b of the left mounting member 2423. Accordingly, the left mounting member 2423 is provided on the mounting base 2410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 2414.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the right attachment member 2424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right mounting member 2424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421. The right attachment member 2424 includes a flange portion 2424a and a claw portion 2424b.

  The flange portion 2424a is formed in the middle of the right and left of the right mounting member 2424. The flange portion 2424 a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 2421.

  The claw portion 2424b is formed at the left end portion of the right mounting member 2424. The claw portion 2424b has a tip portion protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 2424. A plurality of claw portions 2424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 2424b are formed at substantially the same interval as the interval in the circumferential direction of the engagement hole 2421e of the base member 2421.

  The right mounting member 2424 configured in this manner has its left end inserted into the right end of the base member 2421, and the tip of the claw portion 2424 b engages with the engagement hole 2421 e of the base member 2421. Accordingly, the right mounting member 2424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 2421. Also, as shown in FIG. 89, the right attachment member 2424 is supported by the right receiving member 2412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 2412.

  The light emitting unit 2430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 2430 is accommodated in the drum body 2420. The light emitting unit 2430 includes a substrate 2431 and an LED 2432.

  The substrate 2431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The substrate 2431 is disposed inside the reel sheet 2422. The board | substrate 2431 is arrange | positioned behind the shaft member 2414, and is fixed to the shaft member 2414 via the connection member 2414a. Thereby, even if the drum main body 2420 rotates, the board | substrate 2431 is hold | maintained at the attachment base 2410 with the attitude | position which orient | assigned the plate | board surface to the front-back direction (it is comprised so that it may not rotate integrally with the drum main body 2420). ).

  The LEDs 2432 are arranged at the lower left part, the upper part (upper part in the left and right central part) and the lower right part of the substrate 2431. The LED 2432 is configured to be able to emit light in the forward direction by being turned on.

  The drive transmission mechanism 2440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 2420. As shown in FIGS. 89 and 97, the drive transmission mechanism 2440 is provided on the left receiving member 2413. The drive transmission mechanism 2440 includes a motor 2441, an upper gear 2442, and a lower gear 2443.

  The motor 2441 is supported on the upper part of the left receiving member 2413. The motor 2441 is disposed above the housing member 2411. A rotation shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 2441.

  The upper gear 2442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 2441a of the motor 2441 via the bush 2442a. The upper gear 2442 is disposed above the left mounting member 2423.

  The lower gear 2443 is an external gear that is rotatably supported by the left receiving member 2413. The lower gear 2443 is disposed between the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423 and meshes with the upper gear 2442 and the left mounting member 2423, respectively.

  Next, the operation mode of the rendering device 2400 will be described. In addition, as an example of the operation mode of the rendering device 2400, the state where the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state where the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state where the player is visible (the state where the symbol C is facing forward). The operation mode when changing the state will be described.

  First, the rendering device 2400 turns on the LED 2432 and drives the motor 2441. As a result, the power of the motor 2441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 2441a, the upper gear 2442, the lower gear 2443, and the left mounting member 2423, and the left mounting member 2423 rotates in the circumferential direction around its axis. As a result, the drum body 2420 rotates relative to the mounting base 2410 and the light emitting unit 2430.

  Thereafter, the rendering device 2400 stops the motor 2441. As a result, the rendering device 2400 arranges a predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 92) printed on the reel sheet 2422 at the front end. Thereby, the rendering device 2400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits light from the LED 2432 from the reel sheet 2422. In this way, the rendering device 2400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the drum main body 2420 according to this embodiment includes a first notch portion 2422a to a third notch portion 2422c and a first protrusion portion 2421a to a third protrusion portion 2421c, respectively. Engaged. This can prevent the reel sheet 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being shifted due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422.

  Further, according to the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment, since the relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422 can be prevented without using a double-sided tape, the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, assembly work of the drum body 2420 will be described.

  First, the left mounting member 2423 is brought into contact with the base member 2421 shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, and the base member 2421 and the left mounting member 2423 are fixed by screws.

  Next, the reel sheet 2422 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 2421. At this time, the reel sheet 2422 is rounded so that ends in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 2422 overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, the overlapping portion 2422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 2422 is inserted into the base member 2421 so that the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c and the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 96). As a result, the reel sheet 2422 is attached to the base member 2421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 2422a to the third cutout portion 2422c are used as a guide for the mounting position on the base member 2421.

  Thereafter, the left end portion of the right attachment member 2424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 2421, and the claw portion 2424 b of the right attachment member 2424 is engaged with the engagement hole 2421 e of the base member 2421. Thus, the assembly work of the drum body 2420 is completed.

  The reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) a circumferential position with respect to the base member 2421 with reference to the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c. According to this, compared with the case where the reel sheet | seat 2422 is positioned only by one notch part, it can position with a sufficient precision.

  Here, if the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c (and the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the pattern C is identified by the base member 2421 during assembly. May shift in the circumferential direction (rotation direction) with respect to the position. Specifically, when the first notch 2422a is engaged with the second protrusion 2421b, the second notch 2422b is engaged with the third protrusion 2421c and the third notch 2422c is the first. The first protrusion 2421a is engaged. In this case, even if all the notches 2422a to 2422c are engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 2422) is displaced by 120 ° from the specific position.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 95, the distance L1a from the first notch portion 2422a to the second notch portion 2422b is equal to the second notch portion 2422b to the third notch portion 2422c. The distance L2a is different from the distance L2a. In this case, if notches corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first notch 2422a corresponding to the first protrusion 2421a) are not engaged, all the notches 2422a to 2422c are connected to all the protrusions 2421a to 2421a. 2421c cannot be engaged. For example, when the second notch portion 2422b is to be engaged with the first projecting portion 2421a, the positions of the other notch portions 2422a and 2422c in the circumferential direction are shifted with respect to the other projecting portions 2421b and 2421c. It becomes impossible.

  Thus, even if the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c, the reel sheet 2422 has a pattern in which all the notches 2422a to 2422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 2421a to 2421c. Can be one. Thus, the reel sheet 2422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 2421 only by engaging the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c with the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c. Can be arranged with high accuracy. This eliminates the need to realign the mounting position of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 after the reel sheet 2422 is mounted on the base member 2421.

  Further, since the reel sheet 2422 is only accommodated in the base member 2421 (not attached with double-sided tape), it can be smoothly accommodated in the base member 2421. Further, when the direction of the reel sheet 2422 is changed after being accommodated in the base member 2421, it is not necessary to remove the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 2422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 2421. For this reason, the efficiency of the operation | work which attaches the reel sheet | seat 2422 to the base member 2421 can be improved effectively.

  In the reel sheet 2422, the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c are only engaged from the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c. Therefore, the reel sheet 2422 can be easily taken out simply by pulling it out from the base member 2421. According to this, the detachability between the base member 2421 and the reel sheet 2422 can be improved, and the base member 2421 and the reel sheet 2422 can be easily reused.

  Further, the overlapping portion 2422d of the reel sheet 2422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 2422d can be made inconspicuous, aesthetics can be improved.

In addition, the 1st notch part 2422a which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the 1st position specific means based on this invention.
Moreover, the 2nd notch part 2422b which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the 2nd position specific means based on this invention.
Moreover, the 3rd notch part 2422c which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the position specification means which concerns on this invention.
Moreover, the 1st projection part 2421a, the 2nd projection part 2421b, and the 3rd projection part 2421c which concern on this embodiment are one Embodiment of the base member engaging part which concerns on this invention.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is pachinko, but is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this. For example, the number of protrusions and notches is two or four or more. Also good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more. Further, when the number of protrusions and notches is two, the distance from the first notch to the second notch (the distance in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) and the first notch to the first notch The distance to the notch (the distance in the clockwise direction in FIG. 95) may be different.

  The place where the three notches 2422a to 2422c are formed in the reel sheet 2422 is not limited to the left end. The three notches 2422a to 2422c may be formed at the right end of the reel sheet 2422, for example. In this case, the three notches 2422a to 2422c may be engaged with the right attachment member 2424.

  The three notches 2422a to 2422c are formed at the left end of the reel sheet 2422 (arranged in the left-right direction), but are not limited to this. It may be displaced in the direction.

  Further, the reel sheet 2422 may be configured to engage with the base member 2421 and the right attachment member 2424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 2422 is formed with, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end. The right attachment member 2424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the right notch of the reel sheet 2422. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reel sheet 2422 from rotating relative to the base member 2421 at the left end and the right end of the reel sheet 2422. Thereby, relative rotation of the reel sheet 2422 with respect to the base member 2421 can be reliably prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the reel sheet 2422 includes a plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel sheet 2422 may include a plurality of protrusions. Good. In this case, the base member 2421 includes notches that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

  Further, the reel sheet 2422 has three notches 2422a to 2422c as a guide for the mounting position, but the guide of the mounting position is not limited to the notch, and a plurality of prints printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 2422. It may be a mark. In this case, the plurality of marks function as position specifying means according to the present invention.

  The configuration of the drum main body 2420 is not limited to the present embodiment, and for example, a configuration like a drum main body 2520 according to the modification shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 may be used.

  The drum main body 2520 according to the modified example is different from the drum main body 2420 according to the present embodiment in the configuration of the base member 2521 and the left mounting member 2523. The base member 2521 includes an opening 2521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 2421 according to this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the opening 2521f is formed in the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 2521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 2521 in the left-right direction. The opening 2521f is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (tapered shape).

  As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, the left mounting member 2523 includes a pressing portion 2523c in addition to the configuration of the left mounting member 2423 according to the present embodiment. The pressing portion 2523c is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 2523. The pressing portion 2523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right direction (in a tapered shape). As shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, the pressing portion 2523 c is inserted through the opening 2521 f of the base member 2521. The pressing portion 2523c is arranged slightly inward of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 2422) in the radial direction.

  In the modification, when the reel sheet 2422 is accommodated in the base member 2521, the overlapping portion 2422 d is disposed between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2521 and the pressing portion 2523 c of the left mounting member 2523. The overlapping portion 2422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 2421 by the pressing portion 2523c.

  With this configuration, the overlapping portion 2422d can be held by the pressing portion 2523c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the overlapping portion 2422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 2422 in the circumferential direction) from being deformed so as to be warped radially inward and generating a gap. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. For this reason, it can prevent that the beauty | look is impaired.

  Below, the structure of the production | presentation apparatus 3400 which concerns on 2nd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit is demonstrated in detail.

  A rendering device 3400 shown in FIG. 101 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to a player by rotating a drum-like accessory (a drum main body 3420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 101 to 103, the rendering device 3400 includes a mounting base 3410, a drum body 3420, a light emitting unit 3430, and a drive transmission mechanism 3440.

  The mounting base 3410 supports a drum main body 3420 and the like which will be described later. The mounting base 3410 includes a housing member 3411, a right receiving member 3412, a left receiving member 3413, and a shaft member 3414.

  The housing member 3411 is for housing the drum body 3420 and the like. The housing member 3411 is formed in a substantially bottomed cylindrical shape with its axial direction facing the left-right direction. The housing member 3411 has a bottom surface disposed on the right side, and has a left part and a front part opened. The housing member 3411 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via a decoration member or the like of the rendering device 3400.

  The right receiving member 3412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 3420. The right receiving member 3412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 3412 is formed so that the outer diameter thereof can be accommodated in the accommodating member 3411. The right receiving member 3412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the housing member 3411 with a screw and is housed in the housing member 3411.

  The left receiving member 3413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum main body 3420. The left receiving member 3413 is formed in a substantially plate shape whose plate surface is directed in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 3413 is formed such that its front-rear width is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the housing member 3411. Further, the left receiving member 3413 is formed such that the vertical width thereof is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 3411. The left receiving member 3413 has a lower portion of the right side surface that is recessed leftward except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left receiving member 3413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 3411 with a screw. The left receiving member 3413 includes an outer protrusion 3413a and an inner protrusion 3413b.

  The outer protrusion 3413a is formed at the lower portion (the recessed portion) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413. The outer protruding portion 3413a protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 3413. The outer protrusion 3413a is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side.

  The inner protrusion 3413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 3413a. The inner protrusion 3413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. In addition, the inner protrusion 3413b has an inner edge formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the shaft member 3414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is in the left-right direction. The left end of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the inner protrusion 3413b. The right end portion of the shaft member 3414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 3411 and the right receiving member 3412. The shaft member 3414 supports a light emitting unit 3430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 3414a attached to the middle part of the left and right.

  The drum body 3420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. As shown in FIGS. 104 to 106, the drum body 3420 includes a base member 3421, a reel sheet 3422, a left side mounting member 3423, and a right side mounting member 3424.

  The base member 3421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 3422 to be described later. The base member 3421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. Base member 3421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end to the left end. The base member 3421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof can be accommodated in the accommodation member 3411 (see FIG. 101). The base member 3421 has a left portion closed and a right portion opened. The base member 3421 is formed of a transparent resin material and configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the base member 3421 includes a first protrusion 3421a, a second protrusion 3421b, a third protrusion 3421c, a through hole 3421d, and an engagement hole 3421e.

  The first protrusion 3421a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421. The first protrusion 3421 a is disposed at the left end portion of the base member 3421 and is formed to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 3421. Thus, the first protrusion 3421a is formed to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 3421. The first protrusion 3421a is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the side. The first projecting portion 3421a is formed at the rear end portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position at 3 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 107).

  The second protrusion 3421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 3421a. The second protrusion 3421b is disposed with a space in the circumferential direction of the base member 3421 with respect to the first protrusion 3421a. The second projecting portion 3421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (the position between 10:00 and 11:00 of the timepiece in FIG. 107).

  The third protrusion 3421c is formed to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second protrusion 3421b with respect to the upper and lower central part of the base member 3421. The third protrusion 3421c is formed at the front lower part of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 (position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 107).

  The through hole 3421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in a side view. The through hole 3421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted. The through hole 3421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 3421 in the left-right direction.

  The engagement hole 3421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 3421. The engagement hole 3421e penetrates the base member 3421 in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of engagement holes 3421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the base member 3421 configured in this manner is attached to the housing member 3411 via a left attachment member 3423 and the like which will be described later. Thereby, the base member 3421 is accommodated in the accommodating member 3411, and it is comprised so that a player can visually recognize from the front. As shown in FIG. 102, the shaft member 3414 is inserted through the through hole 3421 d of the base member 3421. The base member 3421 is provided on the mounting base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the reel sheet 3422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually recognize the game effect. In the present embodiment, as the symbol C, a plurality of symbols such as a numeric symbol “111” and a character symbol “HIT” are employed. Further, the symbol C is appropriately omitted in the drawings except the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 105, 106, and 111) in order to make the other members easy to see.
The reel sheet 3422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel sheet 3422 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 3421. The reel sheet 3422 is formed such that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 3421. The reel sheet 3422 is coated with a paint that transmits light on a portion corresponding to the pattern C on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is coated with a paint that does not transmit light (shields light) on other portions. Thus, the reel sheet 3422 is configured to transmit light in a portion where the pattern C is printed, and is configured not to transmit light in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 106 and 108, the reel sheet 3422 includes a first notch 3422a, a second notch 3422b, a third notch 3422c, and an overlapping portion 3422d.

  The first notch 3422 a is formed at the left rear end of the reel sheet 3422. The first notch 3422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 3422 a corresponds to the first protrusion 3421 a of the base member 3421. That is, the first notch 3422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 3421a.

  The second notch 3422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 3422a. The second notch 3422b is arranged with a space in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 3422 with respect to the first notch 3422a. The second notch 3422 b is formed in the front upper portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 3422. The second notch 3422b corresponds to the second protrusion 3421b. That is, the second notch 3422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 3421b.

  The third cutout portion 3422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second cutout portion 3422b with respect to the vertical center portion of the reel sheet 3422. The third notch 3422 c is formed at the front lower portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 3422. The third notch 3422c corresponds to the third protrusion 3421c. In other words, the third notch 3422c is configured to be engageable with the third protrusion 3421c.

  The distance L1b in the clockwise direction in FIG. 108 from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 108 from the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. It is formed to be longer than the distance L2b.

  The overlapping portion 3422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheet 3422 overlaps in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed from the left end portion of the reel sheet 3422 to the right end portion. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. The overlapping portion 3422d is formed in a portion where the first cutout portion 3422a, the second cutout portion 3422b, and the third cutout portion 3422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 3422d according to the present embodiment is formed in the upper rear portion of the reel sheet 3422.

  The reel sheet 3422 configured as described above is accommodated in the base member 3421 as shown in FIGS. At this time, the first notch 3422a is engaged with the first protrusion 3421a. The second notch 3422b is engaged with the second protrusion 3421b. The third notch 3422c is engaged with the third protrusion 3421c. As described above, the reel sheet 3422 is configured such that the symbol C is disposed at a specific position of the base member 3421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 3421. The symbol C of the reel sheet 3422 is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 in a state where the reel sheet 3422 is accommodated in the base member 3421.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the left attachment member 3423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 3421. The left attachment member 3423 includes a recess 3423a and a through hole 3423b.

  The recess 3423a is a substantially circular recess in a side view formed on the left side surface of the left mounting member 3423. The recess 3423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protrusion 3413a of the left receiving member 3413 (see FIG. 110).

  The through hole 3423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left mounting member 3423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 3423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in side view having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 3414 can be inserted.

  The left mounting member 3423 configured as described above is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 3421 with a screw. Accordingly, the left attachment member 3423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the left mounting member 3423 is supported by the left receiving member 3413 such that the concave portion 3423a is fitted to the outer protruding portion 3413a of the left receiving member 3413 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the shaft member 3414 is inserted through the through hole 3423b of the left mounting member 3423. Accordingly, the left attachment member 3423 is provided on the attachment base 3410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 3414.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the right attachment member 3424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 3421. The right attachment member 3424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421. The right attachment member 3424 includes a flange portion 3424a and a claw portion 3424b.

  The flange portion 3424a is formed in the left and right middle portion of the right mounting member 3424. The flange portion 3424 a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 3421.

  The claw portion 3424b is formed at the left end portion of the right mounting member 3424. The claw portion 3424b has a tip portion protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 3424. A plurality of claw portions 3424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 3424b are formed at substantially the same interval as the circumferential interval of the engagement hole 3421e of the base member 3421.

  The right mounting member 3424 configured as described above has a left end portion inserted into the right end portion of the base member 3421, and a tip end portion of the claw portion 3424 b engages with the engagement hole 3421 e of the base member 3421. Accordingly, the right mounting member 3424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 3421. As shown in FIG. 102, the right attachment member 3424 is supported by the right receiving member 3412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 3412.

  The light emitting unit 3430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 3430 is housed in the drum body 3420. The light emitting unit 3430 includes a substrate 3431 and LEDs 3432.

  The substrate 3431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface is arranged in the front-rear direction. The substrate 3431 is disposed inside the reel sheet 3422. The substrate 3431 is disposed behind the shaft member 3414 and is fixed to the shaft member 3414 via a connecting member 3414a. As a result, the substrate 3431 is held by the mounting base 3410 in a posture in which the plate surface is directed in the front-rear direction even when the drum body 3420 rotates (configured not to rotate integrally with the drum body 3420). ).

  The LEDs 3432 are arranged at the lower left part, the upper part (upper part in the left and right central part) and the lower right part of the substrate 3431. The LED 3432 is configured to be able to irradiate light in the forward direction when turned on.

  The drive transmission mechanism 3440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 3420. As shown in FIGS. 102 and 110, the drive transmission mechanism 3440 is provided on the left receiving member 3413. The drive transmission mechanism 3440 includes a motor 3441, an upper gear 3442, and a lower gear 3443.

  The motor 3441 is supported on the upper part of the left receiving member 3413. The motor 3441 is disposed above the housing member 3411. A rotation shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 3441.

  The upper gear 3442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 3441a of the motor 3441 via the bush 3442a. The upper gear 3442 is disposed above the left mounting member 3423.

  The lower gear 3443 is an external gear that is rotatably supported by the left receiving member 3413. The lower gear 3443 is disposed between the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423, and meshes with the upper gear 3442 and the left mounting member 3423, respectively.

  Next, an operation mode of the rendering device 3400 will be described. In addition, as an example of the operation mode of the rendering device 3400, the state where the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state where the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state where the player is visible (the state where the symbol C is facing forward). The operation mode when changing the state will be described.

  First, the rendering device 3400 turns on the LED 3432 and drives the motor 3441. As a result, the power of the motor 3441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 3441a, the upper gear 3442, the lower gear 3443, and the left mounting member 3423, and the left mounting member 3423 rotates in the circumferential direction about its axis. Accordingly, the drum body 3420 rotates relative to the mounting base 3410 and the light emitting unit 3430.

  Thereafter, the rendering device 3400 stops the motor 3441. As a result, the rendering device 3400 arranges a predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 105) printed on the reel sheet 3422 at the front end. Thus, the rendering device 3400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits light from the LED 3432 from the reel sheet 3422. In this way, the rendering device 3400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the drum main body 3420 according to this embodiment includes a first notch 3422a to a third notch 3422c and a first protrusion 3421a to a third protrusion 3421c, respectively. Engaged. This can prevent the reel sheet 3422 from rotating relative to the base member 3421. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being shifted due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422.

  Further, according to the drum main body 3420 according to the present embodiment, since the relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422 can be prevented without using a double-sided tape, the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Next, assembly work of the drum body 3420 will be described.

  First, the reel sheet 3422 shown in FIGS. 105 and 106 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 3421. At this time, the reel sheet 3422 is rounded so that ends in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 3422 overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, the overlapping portion 3422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 3422 is inserted into the base member 3421 so that the first notch 3422a to the third notch 3422c and the first protrusion 3421a to the third protrusion 3421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 109). As a result, the reel sheet 3422 is attached to the base member 3421. As described above, in this embodiment, the first cutout portion 3422a to the third cutout portion 3422c are used as a guide for the mounting position on the base member 3421.

  Next, the left mounting member 3423 is brought into contact with the base member 3421, and the base member 3421 and the left mounting member 3423 are fixed by screws.

  Thereafter, the left end portion of the right attachment member 3424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 3421, and the claw portion 3424 b of the right attachment member 3424 is engaged with the engagement hole 3421 e of the base member 3421. Thus, the assembly work of the drum body 3420 is completed.

  The reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) a circumferential position with respect to the base member 3421 with reference to the plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c. According to this, compared with the case where the reel sheet | seat 3422 is positioned only by one notch part, it can position with a sufficient precision.

  Here, if the plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c (and the plurality of protrusions 3421a to 3421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the pattern C is identified by the base member 3421 during assembly. May shift in the circumferential direction (rotation direction) with respect to the position. Specifically, when the first notch 3422a is engaged with the second protrusion 3421b, the second notch 3422b is engaged with the third protrusion 3421c and the third notch 3422c is the first. 1 projection 3421a. In this case, even if all the notches 3422a to 3422c are engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 3422) is displaced from the specific position by 120 °.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the distance L1b from the first notch 3422a to the second notch 3422b is equal to the second notch 3422b to the third notch 3422c. The distance L2b is different from the distance L2b. In this case, if notches corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first notch 3422a corresponding to the first protrusion 3421a) are not engaged, all the notches 3422a to 3422c are connected to all the protrusions 3421a to 3421a. 3421c cannot be engaged. For example, if the second notch 3422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 3421a, the positions of the other notches 3422a and 3422c in the circumferential direction are shifted relative to the other protrusions 3421b and 3421c. It becomes impossible.

  Thus, even if the reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c, the reel sheet 3422 has a pattern in which all the notches 3422a to 3422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 3421a to 3421c. Can be one. Thus, the reel sheet 3422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 3421 only by engaging the first notch 3422a to the third notch 3422c with the first protrusion 3421a to the third protrusion 3421c. Can be arranged with high accuracy. This eliminates the need to realign the mounting position of the reel sheet 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 after the reel sheet 3422 is mounted on the base member 3421.

  Further, since the reel sheet 3422 is only accommodated in the base member 3421 (not attached with a double-sided tape), the reel sheet 3422 can be smoothly accommodated in the base member 3421. Further, when the direction of the reel sheet 3422 is changed after being accommodated in the base member 3421, it is not necessary to remove the double-sided tape, and the reel sheet 3422 can be smoothly rotated relative to the base member 3421. For this reason, the efficiency of the operation | work which attaches the reel sheet | seat 3422 to the base member 3421 can be improved effectively.

  In the reel sheet 3422, only the first notch 3422 a to the third notch 3422 c are engaged from the first protrusion 3421 a to the third protrusion 3421 c. Therefore, the reel sheet 3422 can be easily taken out simply by pulling it out from the base member 3421. According to this, the detachability between the base member 3421 and the reel sheet 3422 can be improved, and the base member 3421 and the reel sheet 3422 can be easily reused.

  Further, the overlapping portion 3422d of the reel sheet 3422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the design C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 3422d can be made inconspicuous, aesthetics can be improved.

The three protrusions 3421a to 3421c according to the present embodiment are an embodiment of the base member engaging portion according to the present invention.
The three notches 3422a to 3422c according to the present embodiment are an embodiment of the reel sheet engaging portion according to the present invention.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is pachinko, but is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

  In this embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this. For example, the number of protrusions and notches is one or four or more. Also good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more.

  Further, the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c and the three notches 3422a to 3422c may be arranged at the same interval in the rotation direction of the drum body 3420.

  Further, the place where the three notches 3422a to 3422c are formed in the reel sheet 3422 is not limited to the left end. The three notches 3422a to 3422c may be formed at the right end of the reel sheet 3422, for example. In this case, the three protrusions 3421 a to 3421 c are formed on the right part of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421.

  The three notches 3422a to 3422c are formed at the left end portion of the reel sheet 3422 (arranged in the left-right direction), but are not limited to this. It may be displaced in the direction.

  Further, the reel sheet 3422 may be configured to engage with the base member 3421 and the right attachment member 3424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 3422 has, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end thereof. The right attachment member 3424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the right notch of the reel sheet 3422. With this configuration, the reel sheet 3422 can be prevented from rotating relative to the base member 3421 at the left end and the right end of the reel sheet 3422. Thereby, relative rotation of the reel sheet 3422 with respect to the base member 3421 can be reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the reel sheet 3422 includes a plurality of notches 3422a to 3422c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel sheet 3422 may include a plurality of protrusions. Good. In this case, the base member 3421 includes notches that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

  Further, the base member 3421 is entirely formed of a transparent resin material, but is not limited thereto. The base member 3421 only needs to be able to visually recognize the pattern C from the outside. That is, it is only necessary that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 3421 is transparent. Specifically, for example, the base member 3421 may be formed of a resin material whose half of the outer peripheral surface is transparent.

  Further, the configuration of the drum body 3420 is not limited to the present embodiment, and for example, a configuration such as a drum body 3520 according to the modification shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 may be employed.

  The drum main body 3520 according to the modification is different from the drum main body 3420 according to this embodiment in the configuration of the base member 3521 and the left mounting member 3523. The base member 3521 includes an opening 3521f in addition to the configuration of the base member 3421 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the opening 3521f is formed at the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 3521 and penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 3521 in the left-right direction. The opening 3521f is formed such that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right direction (in a tapered shape).

  As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the left mounting member 3523 includes a pressing portion 3523c in addition to the configuration of the left mounting member 3423 according to the present embodiment. The pressing portion 3523c is formed to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 3523. The pressing portion 3523c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (in a tapered shape). As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the pressing portion 3523 c is inserted through the opening 3521 f of the base member 3521. The pressing portion 3523c is arranged slightly inward of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 3422) in the radial direction.

  In the modification, when the reel sheet 3422 is accommodated in the base member 3521, the overlapping portion 3422 d is disposed between the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3521 and the pressing portion 3523 c of the left mounting member 3523. The overlapping portion 3422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 3421 by the pressing portion 3523c.

  With this configuration, the overlapping portion 3422d can be held by the pressing portion 3523c. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress a gap from being generated by deforming the overlapping portion 3422d (the end portion of the reel sheet 3422 in the circumferential direction) to warp radially inward. According to this, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the gap. For this reason, it can prevent that the beauty | look is impaired.

  Below, the structure of the production | presentation apparatus 4400 which concerns on 3rd embodiment of a 1st movable accessory unit is demonstrated in detail.

  A rendering device 4400 shown in FIG. 114 is a device for giving a visual impression (impact) to the player by rotating a drum-like accessory (a drum main body 4420 described later). As shown in FIGS. 114 to 116, the rendering device 4400 includes a mounting base 4410, a drum body 4420, a light emitting unit 4430, and a drive transmission mechanism 4440.

  The mounting base 4410 supports a drum body 4420 and the like which will be described later. The mounting base 4410 includes a housing member 4411, a right receiving member 4412, a left receiving member 4413, and a shaft member 4414.

  The housing member 4411 is for housing the drum body 4420 and the like. The housing member 4411 is formed in a substantially bottomed cylindrical shape with its axial direction facing the left-right direction. The housing member 4411 has a bottom surface on the right side, and has a left portion and a front portion that are open. The housing member 4411 is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the stage 42 via a decoration member or the like of the rendering device 4400.

  The right receiving member 4412 is for supporting the right end of the drum body 4420. The right receiving member 4412 is formed in a substantially disc shape. The right receiving member 4412 is formed so that its outer diameter is large enough to be accommodated in the accommodating member 4411. The right receiving member 4412 is fixed to the bottom surface (right end portion) of the housing member 4411 with a screw and is housed in the housing member 4411.

  The left receiving member 4413 is for supporting the left end portion of the drum body 4420. The left receiving member 4413 is formed in a substantially plate shape whose plate surface is directed in the left-right direction. The left receiving member 4413 is formed so that its front-rear width is substantially the same as the front-rear width of the housing member 4411. Further, the left receiving member 4413 is formed so that its vertical width is wider than the vertical width of the housing member 4411. The left receiving member 4413 has a lower portion of the right side surface that is recessed to the left except for a part thereof. The lower part of the left receiving member 4413 is fixed to the left end portion of the housing member 4411 with a screw. The left receiving member 4413 includes an outer protrusion 4413a and an inner protrusion 4413b.

  The outer protrusion 4413a is formed in the lower part (the recessed part) of the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413. The outer protruding portion 4413a protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left receiving member 4413. The outer protrusion 4413a is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side.

  The inner protrusion 4413b protrudes rightward from the center of the outer protrusion 4413a. The inner protrusion 4413b is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the side. Further, the inner protrusion 4413b has an inner edge formed in a substantially hexagonal shape when viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 and 116, the shaft member 4414 is a substantially hexagonal columnar member whose axial direction is in the left-right direction. The left end portion of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the inner protruding portion 4413b. The right end portion of the shaft member 4414 is supported by the bottom surface of the housing member 4411 and the right receiving member 4412. The shaft member 4414 supports a light-emitting unit 4430, which will be described later, via a connecting member 4414a attached to the left and right midway portion.

  The drum body 4420 is a member for rotating the pattern C. 117 to 119, the drum body 4420 includes a base member 4421, a reel sheet 4422, a left side mounting member 4423, and a right side mounting member 4424.

  The base member 4421 is for accommodating a reel sheet 4422 to be described later. The base member 4421 is formed in a hollow substantially truncated cone shape whose axial direction is directed in the left-right direction. Base member 4421 is formed such that its outer diameter and inner diameter gradually decrease from the right end to the left end. The base member 4421 is formed so that the outer diameter of the right end portion thereof can be accommodated in the accommodation member 4411 (see FIG. 114). The base member 4421 has a left portion closed and a right portion opened. The base member 4421 is formed of a transparent resin material and configured to be visible inside. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the base member 4421 includes a first protrusion 4421a, a second protrusion 4421b, a third protrusion 4421c, a through hole 4421d, an engagement hole 4421e, and an opening 4421f. To do.

  The first protrusion 4421 a protrudes radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. The first protrusion 4421 a is disposed at the left end portion of the base member 4421 and is formed to be continuous with the bottom surface of the base member 4421. Thus, the first protrusion 4421a is formed so as to protrude rightward from the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The first protrusion 4421a is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the side. The first protrusion 4421a is formed at the rear end of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (at the 3 o'clock position in FIG. 120).

  The second protrusion 4421b is formed in substantially the same shape as the first protrusion 4421a. The second protrusion 4421b is arranged with a space in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421 with respect to the first protrusion 4421a. The second projecting portion 4421b is formed on the front upper portion of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 10:00 and 11:00 of the timepiece in FIG. 120).

  The third protrusion 4421c is formed to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second protrusion 4421b with respect to the center of the upper and lower sides of the base member 4421. The third protrusion 4421c is formed at the front lower part of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 (the position between 7 o'clock and 8 o'clock of the timepiece in FIG. 120).

  The through hole 4421d is a substantially circular hole formed in the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in side view. The through hole 4421d has an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted. The through hole 4421d penetrates the center of the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction.

  The engagement hole 4421e is a substantially quadrangular hole formed at the right end of the base member 4421. The engagement hole 4421e penetrates the base member 4421 in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surface to the inner peripheral surface. A plurality (three in this embodiment) of the engagement holes 4421e are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction.

  The opening 4421f is a hole formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f is formed in the rear upper part of the bottom surface of the base member 4421. The opening 4421f penetrates the bottom surface of the base member 4421 in the left-right direction. The opening 4421f is formed such that its radial width (thickness) gradually narrows toward the right (in a tapered shape) (see FIG. 124).

  As shown in FIG. 114, the base member 4421 configured in this way is attached to the housing member 4411 via a left attachment member 4423 and the like which will be described later. Thereby, the base member 4421 is accommodated in the accommodation member 4411, and it is comprised so that a player can visually recognize from the front. As shown in FIG. 115, the shaft member 4414 is inserted through the through hole 4421d of the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the reel sheet 4422 is a member having a pattern C printed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The symbol C enhances the interest of the player by making the player visually recognize or not visually recognize the game effect. In the present embodiment, as the symbol C, a plurality of symbols such as a numeric symbol “111” and a character symbol “HIT” are employed. Further, the symbol C is omitted as appropriate in the drawings other than the exploded perspective views (FIGS. 118 and 119) in order to make the other members easier to see.
The reel sheet 4422 is configured by rolling a sheet-like member. The reel sheet 4422 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the base member 4421. The reel sheet 4422 is formed so that its lateral width is shorter than the lateral width of the base member 4421. The reel sheet 4422 is coated with a paint that transmits light on the portion corresponding to the pattern C on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is coated with a paint that does not transmit light (shields light) on the other portions. Accordingly, the reel sheet 4422 is configured to transmit light in a portion where the design C is printed, and is configured to transmit light in a portion where the design C is not printed. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 121, the reel sheet 4422 includes a first notch portion 4422a, a second notch portion 4422b, a third notch portion 4422c, and an overlapping portion 4422d.

  The first notch 4422 a is formed at the left rear end of the reel sheet 4422. The first notch 4422a is formed in a substantially arc shape. The first notch 4422 a corresponds to the first protrusion 4421 a of the base member 4421. That is, the first notch 4422a is configured to be engageable with the first protrusion 4421a.

  The second notch 4422b is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first notch 4422a. The second notch 4422b is arranged with a space in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the first notch 4422a. The second notch 4422 b is formed in the front upper portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422. The second notch 4422b corresponds to the second protrusion 4421b. That is, the second notch 4422b is configured to be engageable with the second protrusion 4421b.

  The third cutout portion 4422c is formed so as to be vertically symmetric with respect to the second cutout portion 4422b with respect to the upper and lower central portions of the reel sheet 4422. The third notch 4422 c is formed at the front lower portion of the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422. The third notch 4422c corresponds to the third protrusion 4421c. That is, the third notch 4422c is configured to be able to engage with the third protrusion 4421c.

  The distance L1c in the clockwise direction in FIG. 121 from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b is the clockwise direction in FIG. 121 from the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. It is formed to be longer than the distance L2c.

  The overlapping portion 4422d is a portion (one end portion and the other end portion in the circumferential direction) where the reel sheet 4422 overlaps in the radial direction. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed from the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422 to the right end portion. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the pattern C is not printed. The overlapping portion 4422d is formed in a portion where the first notch portion 4422a, the second notch portion 4422b, and the third notch portion 4422c are not formed. The overlapping portion 4422d according to the present embodiment is formed at the upper rear portion of the reel sheet 4422.

  The reel sheet 4422 configured as described above is accommodated in the base member 4421 as shown in FIGS. At this time, the first notch 4422a is engaged with the first protrusion 4421a. In addition, the second notch 4422b is engaged with the second protrusion 4421b. The third notch 4422c is engaged with the third protrusion 4421c. As described above, the reel sheet 4422 is configured such that the symbol C is disposed at a specific position of the base member 4421 and can be rotated integrally with the base member 4421. The symbol C of the reel sheet 4422 is visible from the outside of the base member 4421 in a state where the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated in the base member 4421.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the left attachment member 4423 is an external gear for rotating the base member 4421. The left mounting member 4423 includes a concave portion 4423a, a through hole 4423b, and a pressing portion 4423c.

  The recess 4423a is a substantially circular recess in a side view formed on the left side surface of the left mounting member 4423. The recess 4423a is formed so as to have an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the outer protrusion 4413a of the left receiving member 4413 (see FIG. 123).

  The through hole 4423b is a hole that penetrates the center of the left mounting member 4423 in the left-right direction. The through hole 4423b is formed in a substantially circular shape in a side view having an inner diameter through which the shaft member 4414 can be inserted.

  The pressing portion 4423c protrudes rightward from the right side surface of the left mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed on the rear upper portion of the right side surface of the left mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c is formed so as to extend in the circumferential direction of the left mounting member 4423 (in a substantially arc shape in a side view). The pressing portion 4423c is formed so that its radial width (thickness) is gradually narrowed toward the right (in a tapered shape) (see FIG. 124). The pressing portion 4423 c is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the opening 4421 f of the base member 4421.

  The left mounting member 4423 configured as described above is fixed to the bottom surface (left end portion) of the base member 4421 with a screw. Accordingly, the left mounting member 4423 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. 115 and 123, the left mounting member 4423 is supported by the left receiving member 4413 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the concave portion 4423a into the outer protruding portion 4413a of the left receiving member 4413. Further, the shaft member 4414 is inserted into the through hole 4423b of the left mounting member 4423. Accordingly, the left mounting member 4423 is provided on the mounting base 4410 so as to be rotatable relative to the shaft member 4414.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, the pressing portion 4423 c is inserted through the opening 4421 f of the base member 4421. The pressing portion 4423c is arranged slightly inward of the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 (about twice the thickness of the reel sheet 4422) in the radial direction. The pressing portion 4423c is disposed on the radially inner side of the overlapping portion 4422d and presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. Thus, the pressing portion 4423c holds the overlapping portion 4422d in a posture along the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the right attachment member 4424 is a substantially annular member attached to the right end portion of the base member 4421. The right attachment member 4424 is formed so that the outer diameter of the left end portion thereof is smaller than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421. The right attachment member 4424 includes a flange portion 4424a and a claw portion 4424b.

  The flange portion 4424a is formed in the middle of the right and left of the right mounting member 4424. The flange portion 4424 a is formed so that its outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421 and smaller than the outer diameter of the right end portion of the base member 4421.

  The claw portion 4424 b is formed at the left end portion of the right mounting member 4424. The claw portion 4424b has a tip portion protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the right mounting member 4424. A plurality of claw portions 4424b are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction. More specifically, three claw portions 4424b are formed at substantially the same interval as the circumferential interval of the engagement hole 4421e of the base member 4421.

  The right attachment member 4424 configured as described above has a left end portion inserted into a right end portion of the base member 4421, and a tip end portion of the claw portion 4424 b engages with an engagement hole 4421 e of the base member 4421. Accordingly, the right mounting member 4424 is configured to be rotatable integrally with the base member 4421. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115, the right attachment member 4424 is supported by the right receiving member 4412 so as to be relatively rotatable by fitting the right end portion thereof into a recess formed in the right receiving member 4412.

  The light emitting unit 4430 is for irradiating light in the forward direction. The light emitting unit 4430 is housed in the drum body 4420. The light emitting unit 4430 includes a substrate 4431 and LEDs 4432.

  The substrate 4431 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and the plate surface is arranged in the front-rear direction. The substrate 4431 is disposed inside the reel sheet 4422. The substrate 4431 is disposed behind the shaft member 4414 and is fixed to the shaft member 4414 via a connecting member 4414a. Thereby, even if the drum main body 4420 rotates, the substrate 4431 is held by the mounting base 4410 with its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction (configured not to rotate integrally with the drum main body 4420). ).

  The LEDs 4432 are arranged at the lower left part, the upper part (upper part in the left and right central part), and the lower right part of the substrate 4431. The LED 4432 is configured to be able to emit light in the forward direction by being turned on.

  The drive transmission mechanism 4440 is for transmitting a driving force to the drum body 4420. As shown in FIGS. 115 and 123, the drive transmission mechanism 4440 is provided on the left receiving member 4413. The drive transmission mechanism 4440 includes a motor 4441, an upper gear 4442, and a lower gear 4443.

  The motor 4441 is supported on the upper part of the left receiving member 4413. The motor 4441 is disposed above the housing member 4411. A rotation shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 is formed to extend leftward from the main body of the motor 4441.

  The upper gear 4442 is an external gear fixed to the rotating shaft 4441a of the motor 4441 via the bush 4442a. The upper gear 4442 is disposed above the left attachment member 4423.

  The lower gear 4443 is an external gear that is rotatably supported by the left receiving member 4413. The lower gear 4443 is disposed between the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423 and meshes with the upper gear 4442 and the left mounting member 4423, respectively.

  Next, the operation mode of the rendering device 4400 will be described. In addition, as an example of the operation mode of the effect device 4400, the state from which the player cannot visually recognize the symbol C (the state where the symbol C is not facing forward) is changed to the state where the player is visible (the state where the symbol C is facing forward). The operation mode when changing the state will be described.

  First, the rendering device 4400 turns on the LED 4432 and drives the motor 4441. Thereby, the power of the motor 4441 is transmitted in the order of the rotating shaft 4441a, the upper gear 4442, the lower gear 4443, and the left mounting member 4423, and the left mounting member 4423 rotates in the circumferential direction around the axis. Accordingly, the drum body 4420 rotates relative to the mounting base 4410 and the light emitting unit 4430.

  Thereafter, the rendering device 4400 stops the motor 4441. Thereby, the rendering device 4400 arranges a predetermined symbol C (for example, “111” shown in FIG. 118) printed on the reel sheet 4422 at the front end. Thus, the rendering device 4400 displays a predetermined symbol C to the player and transmits light from the LED 4432 from the reel sheet 4422. In this way, the rendering device 4400 gives the player the impression that the predetermined symbol C is emitting light.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the drum main body 4420 according to this embodiment includes a first notch 4422a to a third notch 4422c and a first protrusion 4421a to a third protrusion 4421c. Engaged. Accordingly, the reel sheet 4422 can be prevented from rotating relative to the base member 4421. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the symbol C displayed to the player from being shifted due to the relative rotation of the reel sheet 4422.

  Next, assembly work of the drum body 4420 will be described.

  First, the reel sheet 4422 shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 is rolled and accommodated in the base member 4421. At this time, the reel sheet 4422 is rolled so that the ends in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422 overlap in the radial direction. Thereby, the overlapping portion 4422d is formed. Then, the reel sheet 4422 is inserted into the base member 4421 so that the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c and the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c are engaged with each other. (See FIG. 122). As a result, the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first cutout portion 4422a to the third cutout portion 4422c are used as a guide for the mounting position on the base member 4421.

  Next, the left mounting member 4423 is brought into contact with the base member 4421, and the base member 4421 and the left mounting member 4423 are fixed by screws. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c is inserted into the opening 4421f of the base member 4421. At this time, the pressing portion 4423c enters the inside of the base member 4421 with the overlapping portion 4422d interposed between the pressing portion 4423c and the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 in the radial direction. Thus, when the base member 4421 and the left mounting member 4423 are fixed, the pressing portion 4423c presses the overlapping portion 4422d against the inner peripheral surface (radially outer side) of the base member 4421 inside the base member 4421. It becomes.

  Thereafter, the left end portion of the right attachment member 4424 is inserted into the right end portion of the base member 4421, and the claw portion 4424 b of the right attachment member 4424 is engaged with the engagement hole 4421 e of the base member 4421. Thus, the assembly work of the drum main body 4420 is completed.

  Since the drum main body 4420 according to this embodiment is configured to accommodate the reel sheet 4422 in the base member 4421, it is possible to restrict the reel sheet 4422 from opening due to its elasticity by the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421. it can. Accordingly, the reel sheet 4422 can be held in a rolled state without the reel sheet 4422 being attached to the base member 4421 with a double-sided tape. Accordingly, when the reel sheet 4422 is attached to the base member 4421, a double-sided tape is not necessary, and the reel sheet 4422 can be smoothly accommodated in the base member 4421. Further, the reel sheet 4422 can be easily taken out from the base member 4421 simply by being pulled out from the base member 4421. Accordingly, the detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel sheet 4422 can be improved, and the base member 4421 and the reel sheet 4422 can be easily reused. In addition, the manufacturing cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts.

  In addition, the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment suppresses deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d by the pressing portion 4423c. Specifically, when the left mounting member 4423 that does not include the pressing portion 4423c shown in FIG. 125 (a) is assembled to the base member 4421, the reel sheet 4422 becomes an overlapping portion as shown in FIG. 125 (b). Since 4422d is not fixed, an end portion in the circumferential direction (more specifically, an end portion on the radially inner side) may be deformed so as to warp radially inward. As a result, a gap S may be formed. In this case, since the light of the LED 4432 leaks from the gap S, the gap S may be conspicuous and the aesthetic appearance may be impaired.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 124, in this embodiment, the overlapping portion 4422d is pressed against the inner peripheral surface of the base member 4421 by the pressing portion 4423c. According to this, the overlapping portion 4422d can be held in a predetermined posture (deformation can be suppressed). Thereby, since it can prevent that light leaks from the edge part in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet | seat 4422, it can prevent that an external appearance is impaired.

  Further, the overlapping portion 4422d of the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment is formed in a portion where the design C is not printed. According to this, since the overlapping portion 4422d can be made inconspicuous, the beauty can be improved.

  In addition, the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment can determine (position) the circumferential position with respect to the base member 4421 with reference to the plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c. According to this, compared with the case where the reel sheet | seat 4422 is positioned only by one notch part, it can position with a sufficient precision.

  Here, if the plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c (and the plurality of protrusions 4421a to 4421c) are arranged at the same interval in the circumferential direction, the pattern C is identified by the base member 4421 during assembly. May shift in the circumferential direction (rotation direction) with respect to the position. Specifically, when the first notch 4422a is engaged with the second protrusion 4421b, the second notch 4422b is engaged with the third protrusion 4421c and the third notch 4422c is the second. The first protrusion 4421a is engaged. In this case, even if all the notches 4422a to 4422c are engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4421c, the pattern C (reel sheet 4422) is displaced from the specific position by 120 °.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the distance L1c from the first notch 4422a to the second notch 4422b is equal to the second notch 4422b to the third notch 4422c. It is formed to be a different distance from the distance L2c. In this case, if notches corresponding to the protrusions (for example, the first notch 4422a corresponding to the first protrusion 4421a) are not engaged, all the notches 4422a to 4422c are connected to all the protrusions 4421a to 4421a. 4421c cannot be engaged. For example, when the second notch 4422b is to be engaged with the first protrusion 4421a, the positions of the other notches 4422a and 4422c in the circumferential direction are shifted relative to the other protrusions 4421b and 4421c. It becomes impossible.

  Thus, even if the reel sheet 4422 according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c, the reel sheet 4422 has a pattern in which all the notches 4422a to 4422c can be engaged with all the protrusions 4421a to 4421c. Can be one. Thus, the reel sheet 4422 can be moved to a specific position of the base member 4421 only by engaging the first notch 4422a to the third notch 4422c with the first protrusion 4421a to the third protrusion 4421c. Can be arranged with high accuracy. This eliminates the need to realign the mounting position of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 after the reel sheet 4422 is mounted on the base member 4421.

  In addition, the holding | suppressing part 4423c which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the pressing member which concerns on this invention.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the type of gaming machine is pachinko, but is not limited to this, and may be a slot machine or the like.

  In addition, although the reel sheet 4422 is configured such that the ends in the circumferential direction overlap in the radial direction, the present invention is not limited to this. The reel sheet 4422 is not limited to the end portion, and at least a part of the reel sheet 4422 may overlap in the radial direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the entire end portion of the reel sheet 4422 (from the left end to the right end of the circumferential end portion) overlaps, but only a part of the end portions may overlap. The state in which the end portions of the reel sheet 4422 are overlapped is also included in the “partly overlapping end portions of the reel sheet”.

  Further, the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423, but the member on which the pressing portion 4423c is formed is not limited to the left mounting member 4423. The pressing portion 4423c may be formed on the base member 4421 or the right attachment member 4424, for example. The pressing portion 4423c may be configured by a predetermined member (a member different from the left mounting member 4423) fixed to the opening 4421f of the base member 4421.

  Further, the pressing portion 4423c can be configured to press the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. In such a case, the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423 and the right mounting member 4424, for example. With this configuration, the overlapping portion 4422d can be pressed at the left end portion and the right end portion of the overlapping portion 4422d. Thereby, deformation | transformation of the superimposition part 4422d can be prevented reliably. Note that the right attachment member 4424 may press the overlapping portion 4422d with the claw portion 4424b. In this case, the claw portion 4424b functions as a pressing member.

  In this embodiment, the number of protrusions and notches is three, but the number of protrusions and notches is not limited to this. For example, the number of protrusions and notches is one or four or more. Also good. However, from the viewpoint that the positioning accuracy can be improved, the number of protrusions and notches is preferably three or more.

  In addition, the three protrusions 4421a to 4421c and the three notches 4422a to 4422c may be arranged at the same interval in the rotation direction of the drum body 4420.

  The three notches 4422a to 4422c are formed at the left end of the reel sheet 4422 (arranged in the left-right direction), but are not limited thereto, and It may be displaced in the direction.

  Further, the reel sheet 4422 can be configured to engage with the base member 4421 and the right attachment member 4424, respectively. In such a case, the reel sheet 4422 has, for example, three notches at the left end and the right end thereof. The right attachment member 4424 includes three protrusions that can be engaged with the right notch of the reel sheet 4422. With this configuration, relative rotation of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 can be prevented at the left end portion and the right end portion of the reel sheet 4422. Thereby, relative rotation of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the base member 4421 can be reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the reel sheet 4422 includes a plurality of notches 4422a to 4422c. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel sheet 4422 may include a plurality of protrusions. Good. In this case, the base member 4421 includes notches that can engage with the plurality of protrusions.

  The reel sheet 4422 has three notches 4422a to 4422c as a guide for the mounting position. However, the guide of the mounting position is not limited to the notch, and a plurality of prints printed on the outer peripheral surface of the reel sheet 4422. It may be a mark.

  Further, the base member 4421 is entirely formed of a transparent resin material, but is not limited thereto. The base member 4421 only needs to be able to visually recognize the pattern C from the outside. That is, it is only necessary that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the base member 4421 is transparent. Specifically, the base member 4421 may be formed of, for example, a resin material whose half of the outer peripheral surface is transparent.

  Next, the overall configuration of the game ball sorting apparatus 5400 shown in FIGS. 126 to 128 will be described.

  The game ball sorting device 5400 is for sorting the game balls A (see FIG. 131) into a plurality of passages. The game ball distribution device 5400 includes a base member 5410, a rotation distribution mechanism 5420, a plate-shaped member 5430, a croon 5440, a guide member 5450, a pressing member 5460, and a sensor group 5470.

  The base member 5410 is a member for guiding the game ball A into the game ball sorting device 5400. The base member 5410 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side. The right portion of the base member 5410 projects upward from the other portions. The base member 5410 includes an inlet 5411, an introduction path 5412, a left guide path 5413, a right guide path 5414, an installation space 5415, and an opening 5416.

  The inflow port 5411 is a hole (inlet) for allowing the game ball A to enter. The inflow port 5411 is formed at the upper right end (protruding portion) of the base member 5410. The inflow port 5411 is formed in a substantially square shape in plan view. The inflow port 5411 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The inflow port 5411 is disposed below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The inflow port 5411 is configured such that the game ball A can enter from above.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the introduction path 5412 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the inlet 5411 downward. The introduction path 5412 is formed so as to extend downward from the inlet 5411.

  The left guide path 5413 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left. The left guide path 5413 is formed to extend from the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower left.

  The right guide path 5414 is a passage for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the lower right. The right guide path 5414 is formed so as to extend to the lower right from the lower end portion of the introduction path 5412, and is formed so that the extended end portion extends downward. The right guide portion is formed from the middle part of the base member 5410 to the lower end part. The right guide path 5414 includes a guide portion 5414a.

  The guide 5414a is for guiding the game ball A guided to the lower end of the right guide path 5414 in the backward direction. The guide portion 5414a is formed at the lower end portion of the right guide path 5414 and is formed in a substantially arc shape when viewed from the side.

  The installation space 5415 is an internal space of a base member 5410 in which a later-described cleon 5440 and the like are provided. The installation space 5415 is formed from the left and right midway part (left side of the left guide path 5413) to the left end part of the base member 5410. The right end of the installation space 5415 is in communication with the left guide path 5413.

  As shown in FIG. 126 and FIG. 129, the opening 5416 is a hole (inspection entrance) for allowing the game ball A to enter during the inspection described later. The opening 5416 is formed at the upper end of the front side surface of the base member 5410 and penetrates the base member 5410 in the front-rear direction. The opening 5416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The opening 5416 is formed from the left and right midway part (left side of the left guide path 5413) to the vicinity of the left end part of the base member 5410. Opening 5416 is in communication with the upper end of installation space 5415. The opening 5416 is formed such that its vertical width is such that it can enter the game ball A, and the game ball A can be entered from the front in all areas. The opening 5416 is blocked by the glass door 13 when the player plays a game, and the game ball A cannot enter the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game balls A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 is provided at the lower end of the introduction path 5412. The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 includes a rotating body 5421, a pin 5422, a sheet metal 5423, and a magnet 5424.

  The rotating body 5421 is formed in a substantially inverted T shape in rear view having a portion extending in the left-right direction and a portion extending in the upward direction. As shown in FIG. 129, the rotating body 5421 includes a base 5421a, a protruding portion 5421b, a left receiving portion 5421c, and a right receiving portion 5421d.

  The base 5421 a is a portion extending in the left-right direction of the rotating body 5421. The base 5421a is formed so that the lateral width thereof is substantially the same as the lateral width of the introduction path 5412.

  The protruding portion 5421b is a portion extending in the upward direction of the rotating body 5421. The protruding portion 5421b is formed to extend from the left and right central portion of the base portion 5421a.

  The left receiving portion 5421c is a portion that receives the game ball A at the left portion of the rotating body 5421. The left receiving portion 5421c is formed by the left portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the left side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

  The right receiving part 5421d is a part that receives the game ball A in the right part of the rotating body 5421. The right receiving portion 5421d is formed by the right portion of the upper side surface of the base portion 5421a and the right side surface of the protruding portion 5421b.

  The pin 5422 is arranged with its axial direction facing the front-rear direction. The pin 5422 is inserted into the base 5421a of the rotating body 5421. Further, the front end portion of the pin 5422 is fixed to the base member 5410, and the rear end portion thereof is fixed to a plate-like member 5430 (see FIG. 128) described later. Accordingly, the pin 5422 supports the rotating body 5421 so as to be rotatable relative to the base member 5410.

  The sheet metal 5423 is a plate-like member that is fixed to the rear side surface of the base 5421 a of the rotating body 5421. The sheet metal 5423 is formed such that the left end portion and the right end portion thereof are larger than other portions. The sheet metal 5423 is made of a magnetic material such as iron that is attracted by magnetic force.

  A magnet 5424 shown in FIG. 128 is formed in a substantially disk shape. The magnet 5424 is fixed to a pressing member 5460 described later, and is disposed behind the sheet metal 5423. The magnet 5424 holds the rotating body 5421 by attracting the left end portion of the sheet metal 5423 so that the right receiving portion 5421d as shown in FIG. 129 faces upward and the left receiving portion 5421c faces left.

  Note that a notch (not shown) extending in the left-right direction is formed on the lower surface of the rotating body 5421 of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. A protrusion (not shown) formed on the base member 5410 is disposed inside the notch. The rotating body 5421 is restricted from rotating beyond a predetermined angular range by appropriately contacting the notch with the protrusion. The predetermined angle range is a range from a state in which the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward to a state in which the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward (state shown in FIG. 133). The rotating body 5421 can rotate in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear until the right receiving portion 5421d is turned upward and the left receiving portion 5421c is turned upward. Further, the rotating body 5421 can rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view until the left receiving portion 5421c is turned upward until the right receiving portion 5421d is turned upward.

  The rotation distribution mechanism 5420 configured as described above allows the game ball A guided to the lower end of the introduction path 5412 to be moved to the left guide path 5413 or the right guide path 5414 by rotating the rotating body 5421 in an appropriate direction. Distribute. The distribution operation of the game balls A by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIGS. 126 to 128, the plate-like member 5430 is for closing the right rear portion of the base member 5410. The plate-like member 5430 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The plate-like member 5430 is formed so that the vertical width and the horizontal width thereof are wider than the vertical width and the horizontal width of the base member 5410. The plate-like member 5430 includes a left side through hole 5431 and a right side through hole 5432.

  The left through-hole 5431 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the left portion of the plate-like member 5430. The left through hole 5431 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the installation space 5415 in front view.

  The right through hole 5432 is a hole that penetrates the plate surface in the front-rear direction at the lower right portion of the plate-like member 5430. The right through hole 5432 is formed in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The right through hole 5432 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to pass therethrough.

  The plate-like member 5430 is disposed behind the base member 5410 and is fixed to the base member 5410 with screws. As a result, the left through hole 5431 communicates with the installation space 5415. The right through hole 5432 communicates with the lower end of the right guide path 5414.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the croon 5440 is a dish-shaped member for distributing the game balls A. The crune 5440 is formed in a substantially circular shape in plan view, and is configured such that the game ball A can roll on the upper side surface thereof. In addition, the upper surface of the croon 5440 is formed in a shape that gradually inclines downward toward the center. That is, the upper surface of the crune 5440 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball A to the center. The cruiser 5440 includes a connection portion 5441, a first start port 5442, out ports 5443 and 5444, and a protruding portion 5445.

  The connection portion 5441 is a portion formed to extend rightward from the front end portion of the upper side surface (portion having a substantially circular shape in a plan view) of the croon 5440. The connecting portion 5441 is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from the right end portion thereof. Further, the connection portion 5441 is configured to be able to guide the game ball A in the left direction.

  The first start port 5442 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in a plan view formed in the front portion of the croon 5440. The first start port 5442 penetrates the cloon 5440 in the vertical direction. The first start port 5442 has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

  The out port 5443 is a substantially circular hole in a plan view formed in the left rear portion of the cleon 5440 (left rear of the first start port 5442). The out port 5444 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in a plan view formed in the right rear portion of the croon 5440 (to the right of the out port 5443). The out ports 5443 and 5444 are formed to have substantially the same shape as the first start port 5442.

  The protruding portion 5445 is a substantially triangular pyramid portion formed in the central portion of the croon 5440. The protruding portion 5445 is formed so as to protrude upward from the upper side surface of the croon 5440. The protrusion 5445 causes the game ball A to enter the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 by appropriately playing the game ball A guided by the clown 5440. As a result, the game balls A guided by the croon 5440 can be distributed to the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444.

  The croon 5440 configured as described above is fixed to the plate-like member 5430 with screws. The front end portion of the cron 5440 protrudes forward from the left through-hole 5431 and is disposed in the upper portion of the installation space 5415. The connecting portion 5441 is configured such that the right end portion thereof is connected to the lower left end portion of the left guide path 5413 and the game ball A guided to the left lower end portion of the left guide path 5413 can be guided leftward. In addition, the croon 5440 is disposed below the opening 5416. Accordingly, the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 are configured to allow the game ball A to enter directly from the opening 5416 in the inspection described later (see FIG. 134).

  As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the guide member 5450 is a member for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444 to a pressing member 5460 described later. The guide member 5450 is formed in a shape such that the upper side surface of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped member is appropriately depressed downward. The guide member 5450 is formed so that the lateral width thereof is substantially the same as the lateral width of the clune 5440. The guide member 5450 includes a projecting portion 5451, a mounting portion 5452, a front guide path 5453, and a rear guide path 5454.

  The protruding portion 5451 is a portion protruding rearward from the left rear end portion of the upper surface of the guide member 5450. The protrusion 5451 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape.

  The attachment portion 5452 is a recess formed at the front end portion of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450. The attachment portion 5252 has a side wall and a bottom surface formed in a substantially U shape in plan view. A first start port switch 5472, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment portion 5452.

  The front guide path 5453 is a recess formed on the upper side surface of the guide member 5450 and is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first start port 5442 to the pressing member 5460. The front guide path 5453 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view so that the extended end portion extends in the right direction and the extended end portion extends in the rear direction. The front side of the front guide path 5453 is disposed below the attachment portion 5452.

  The rear guide path 5454 is a recess formed in the rear part of the upper side surface of the guide member 5450 and is a path for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out ports 5443 and 5444 to the pressing member 5460. The rear guide path 5454 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view so that the extended end portion extends in the right direction and the extended end portion extends in the rear direction. The rear guide path 5454 is formed between the protruding portion 5451 and the attaching portion 5452. The rear guide path 5454 is formed so as not to communicate with the front guide path 5453.

  The guide member 5450 configured as described above is fixed to the lower portion of the croon 5440 with a screw. The guide member 5450 is fixed to the plate-like member 5430 via the cleon 5440 and is disposed in the lower part of the installation space 5415. The mounting portion 5542 and the front guide path 5453 are disposed below the first start port 5442 of the cleon 5440 and are connected to the left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410 via the first start port 5442. In addition, the rear guide path 5454 has a left end portion and a right front end portion disposed below the out ports 5443 and 5444 and connected to the left guide channel 5413 through the out ports 5443 and 5444.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, the pressing member 5460 is a member for pressing the plate-like member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape capable of closing the left through-hole 5431 and the right through-hole 5432 of the plate-like member 5430 from the rear. The pressing member 5460 is formed in a shape such that its front side surface is appropriately recessed in the rearward direction. The pressing member 5460 includes a placement portion 5461, a right discharge path 5462, a front discharge path 5463, and a rear discharge path 5464.

  The placement portion 5461 is a recess formed in the upper left portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460. The placement portion 5461 is formed in a substantially arc shape in plan view so as to follow the shape of the rear portion of the croon 5440. The placement portion 5461 is formed from the left end portion of the pressing member 5460 to the middle portion on the left and right. The placement portion 5461 is recessed downward with respect to other portions from the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower side surface to the middle portion on the left and right sides.

  The right discharge path 5462 is a path for discharging the game ball A that has passed through the right through hole 5432 of the plate-like member 5430 to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400. The right discharge path 5462 is formed in a shape that extends rearward and that the lower surface of the extended end portion opens to the outside. The right discharge path 5462 is formed at the right end portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460.

  The front discharge path 5463 is a depression formed in the lower portion of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 and the game ball A guided to the rear end of the front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450 is supplied to the game ball distribution device 5400. It is a passage for discharging to the outside. The front discharge path 5463 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The front discharge path 5463 is formed below the placement portion 5461 and to the left of the right discharge path 5462. The front discharge path 5463 is formed to extend downward from below the placement portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

  The rear discharge path 5464 is a recess formed in the lower left part of the front side surface of the pressing member 5460 and distributes the game balls A guided to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450 to the game balls. A passage for discharging the apparatus 5400 to the outside. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The rear discharge path 5464 is disposed below the placement portion 5461 and to the left of the front discharge path 5463. The rear discharge path 5464 is formed to extend downward from the lower portion of the placement portion 5461 to the lower end portion of the pressing member 5460.

  The pressing member 5460 configured as described above is fixed to the rear side surface of the plate-like member 5430 with screws, and closes the left side through hole 5431 and the right side through hole 5432 (the front guide path 5453 and the rear guide path 5454) from the rear. To do. The rear portion of the croon 5440 is placed on the placement unit 5461. In addition, the protruding portion 5451 of the guide member 5450 is placed in a portion that is recessed downwardly from the placement portion 5461. The front discharge channel 5462 has a front end connected to the right through hole 5432. The front discharge path 5463 has an upper end connected to the rear end of the front guide path 5453. The rear discharge path 5464 has an upper end connected to the rear end of the rear guide path 5454.

  The sensor group 5470 is for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414, the front guide path 5453, and the rear guide path 5454. The sensor group 5470 includes an out port switch 5471, a first start port switch 5472, and an out port switch 5473.

  The outlet switch 5471 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414. Out port switch 5471 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The outlet switch 5471 includes a through hole 5471a.

  The through hole 5471a is a substantially circular hole in front view that penetrates the out port switch 5471 in the front-rear direction. The through hole 5471a has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to pass therethrough. The through hole 5471a is formed below the out port switch 5471.

  The outlet switch 5471 configured as described above is attached to the right front end portion of the pressing member 5460. Accordingly, the through hole 5471a is disposed behind the right side through hole 5432 of the plate-like member 5430. For example, the out-out switch 5471 is configured to be able to detect a eddy current generated when the game ball A passes through the magnetic field (through hole 5471a) while forming a magnetic field in the through hole 5471a. The outlet switch 5471 detects that the game ball A has entered the right guide path 5414 based on the detection result of the eddy current.

  The first start port switch 5472 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the front guide path 5453. The first start port switch 5472 is configured in the same manner as the out port switch 5471 except that the plate surface thereof is arranged in the vertical direction and the first start port switch 5472 is attached to the attachment portion 5252 of the guide member 5450. The through hole 5472a is disposed between the first start port 5442 and the front guide path 5453.

  The outlet switch 5473 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the rear guide path 5454. The out port switch 5473 is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5472 except that the out port switch 5473 is attached below the mounting portion 5461 of the pressing member 5460. The through hole 5473a is disposed below the rear discharge path 5464.

  As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the gaming ball sorting apparatus 5400 configured as described above includes a first passage 5501 and a second passage 5502 as passages for distributing the gaming balls A flowing in from the inlet 5411. It has.

  Note that the first start port and the second start port may be provided integrally with the game ball sorting device 5400. In this case, for example, the above-described out port switch 5471 is configured as a first start port switch, and the first start port switch 5472 is configured as a second start port switch. Further, a sensor may be provided at the outlet and used as the V region at a specific timing.

  The first passage 5501 is a passage for guiding the game balls A distributed to the left guide path 5413 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. The first passage 5501 includes a left guide path 5413 of the base member 5410, a connection portion 5441 of the croon 5440, a first start port 5442 and out ports 5443 and 5444, a front guide path 5453 and a rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, In addition, the holding member 5460 includes a front discharge path 5463 and a rear discharge path 5464. The first passage 5501 branches into two passages at a croon 5440. The first passage 5501 includes a third passage 5503 and a fourth passage 5504 as the branched passages.

  The third passage 5503 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first start port 5442 of the clune 5440. The third passage 5503 is configured by a first start port 5442 of the cleon 5440, a front guide path 5453 of the guide member 5450, and a front discharge path 5463 of the pressing member 5460.

  The fourth passage 5504 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the outlets 5443 and 5444 of the croon 5440. The fourth passage 5504 includes the outlets 5443 and 5444 of the clown 5440, the rear guide path 5454 of the guide member 5450, and the rear discharge path 5464 of the pressing member 5460.

  The second passage 5502 is a passage for guiding the game balls A distributed to the right guide path 5414 by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. The second passage 5502 includes a right guide path 5414 of the base member 5410, a right through hole 5432 (see FIG. 128) of the plate-like member 5430, and a right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460.

  Next, the operation | movement aspect of the game ball distribution apparatus 5400 is demonstrated. In the following, it is assumed that the game ball A is entered from the inflow port 5411 with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 facing upward as shown in FIG.

  First, the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 is guided downward by the introduction path 5412 and collides with the right receiving portion 5421d of the rotating body 5421 of the rotary sorting mechanism 5420. Thereby, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the back. By the rotation, the rotator 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower right direction and distributes it to the second passage 5502 (the right guide passage 5414). When the sheet metal 5423 rotates until the left receiving portion 5421c faces upward, the right end portion thereof is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128). Accordingly, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward (see FIG. 133).

  The game balls A distributed to the second passage 5502 (hereinafter referred to as “game balls A2”) are guided in the backward direction by the guide portion 5414a after being guided downward in the right guide path 5414. The game ball A2 passes through the right side through hole 5432 (see FIG. 127) of the plate-like member 5430 in the backward direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132, the game ball A <b> 2 is guided to the front end portion of the right discharge path 5462 of the pressing member 5460. At this time, the game ball A2 passes through the through hole 5471a of the outlet switch 5471 in the backward direction. Thereby, the outlet switch 5471 detects that the game ball A2 has been distributed to the second passage 5502 (the right guide passage 5414). The game ball A2 that has passed through the through hole 5471a is guided rearward through the right discharge path 5462 and discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting apparatus 5400.

  As described above, the right guide path 5414, the right through hole 5432, and the right discharge path 5462 are arranged in the second passage 5502 in order from the upstream side. The second passage 5502 is disposed on the downstream side of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, and an outlet switch 5471 is provided in the middle thereof.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, when the game ball A enters the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410 with the left receiving portion 5421c facing upward, the game ball A is placed on the left side of the rotating body 5421. It collides with the receiving part 5421c. As a result, the rotating body 5421 and the sheet metal 5423 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back. By the rotation, the rotator 5421 guides the game ball A in the lower left direction and distributes it to the first passage 5501 (the left guide passage 5413). When the sheet metal 5423 rotates until the right receiving portion 5421d faces upward, the left end portion thereof is attracted to the magnet 5424 (see FIG. 128). Accordingly, the rotating body 5421 is held by the magnet 5424 with the right receiving portion 5421d facing upward (see FIG. 131).

  The game balls A distributed to the first passage 5501 are guided in the lower left direction along the left guide path 5413 and then guided to the vicinity of the first start port 5442 through the connection portion 5441 of the clune 5440. The game ball A is guided in the clockwise direction in plan view on the upper side surface of the croon 5440 and gradually guided to the center of the croon 5440. At this time, the projecting portion 5445 of the croon 5440 appropriately plays the game ball A. As a result, the croon 5440 causes the game ball A to enter either the first start port 5442 or the out ports 5443 and 5444. In this way, the crune 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504.

  As described above, the first passage 5501 has, in order from the upstream side, the left guide passage 5413, the connection portion 5441, the upper surface of the croon 5440 (a portion having a substantially circular shape in plan view), the third passage 5503, and the fourth passage. A passage 5504 is disposed. The opening 5416 is formed so as to open with respect to the upper surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the croon 5440. That is, the opening 5416 is provided at the same position as the upper surface of the connecting portion 5441 and the croon 5440 (on the downstream side of the left guide passage 5413 and on the upstream side of the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504). Further, the first passage 5501 is disposed on the downstream side of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A3”) distributed to the third passage 5503 (entered into the first start port 5442) is the first start It passes through the through hole 5472a of the mouth switch 5472 in the downward direction. Accordingly, the first start port switch 5472 detects that the game ball A3 has been distributed to the third passage 5503 (the front guide path 5453). The game ball A3 that has passed through the through hole 5472a is guided to the left front end portion of the front guide path 5453. The game ball A3 is guided in the rear direction after being guided in the right direction along the front guide path 5453, and is guided to the upper end portion of the front discharge path 5463. The game ball A3 is guided downward through the front discharge path 5463 and discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400.

  As described above, the first start port 5442, the front guide path 5453, and the front discharge path 5463 are arranged in the third passage 5503 in order from the upstream side. The third passage 5503 is provided with a first start port switch 5472 in the middle thereof.

  On the other hand, the game ball A (hereinafter referred to as “game ball A4”) distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (entered the out-ports 5443 and 5444) is guided to the left front end portion of the rear guide path 5454. Is done. The game ball A4 is guided in the rear direction after being guided in the right direction through the rear guide path 5454, and is guided to the upper end portion of the rear discharge path 5464. The game ball A4 is guided downward through the rear discharge path 5464 and discharged to the outside of the game ball sorting device 5400. At this time, the game ball A4 passes downward through the through-hole 5473a of the outlet switch 5473. Accordingly, the outlet switch 5473 detects that the game ball A4 has been distributed to the fourth passage 5504 (the rear guide path 5454).

  As described above, the outlets 5443 and 5444, the rear guide path 5454, and the rear discharge path 5464 are arranged in order from the upstream side in the fourth passage 5504. The fourth passage 5504 is provided with an outlet switch 5473 in the middle thereof.

  As described above, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game balls A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 in order (with a probability of a half). The Kroon 5440 distributes the game balls A distributed to the first passage 5501 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of one third and distributes the game balls A to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of two thirds. . In other words, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440 distribute the game ball A that has entered the inflow port 5411 to the third passage 5503 with a probability of 1/6 and the second with a probability of 2/6. Sort to passage 5504.

  Here, the game ball sorting apparatus 5400 is inspected at the time of manufacture or maintenance at the hall. In the inspection, the glass door 13 is opened and the game ball A is directly entered into the game ball sorting device 5400, and the flow of the game ball A, the operation of the outlet switch 5471, and the like are confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 131, when inspecting the second passage 5502, the game ball A enters from the inflow port 5411 of the base member 5410. At this time, the game balls A are distributed to the second passage 5502 by the rotational distribution mechanism 5420 with a half probability. In the inspection, the flow of the game balls A2 distributed to the second passage 5502 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the outlet switch 5471 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the outlet switch 5471 has detected that the game ball A2 has passed through the through hole 5471a (see FIG. 132).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 134, when the first passage 5501 is inspected, the game balls A3 and A4 are inserted from the opening 5416 of the base member 5410 into the crune 5440. In this way, the opening 5416 is a game ball A3, A4 from the outside of the game ball distribution device 5400 to the distribution destination (first passage 5501, Clune 5440 in the present embodiment) of the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 in the inspection. Can be entered. The first passage 5501 is inspected by inspecting the third passage 5503 and the fourth passage 5504 with such game balls A3 and A4.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 and 134, when the third passage 5503 is inspected, the game ball A3 is directly entered from the opening 5416 into the first starting port 5442. As a result, the game ball A3 enters the third passage 5503 directly without being distributed by the croon 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A3 entering the third passage 5503 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the first start port switch 5472 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the first start port switch 5472 has detected that the game ball A3 has passed through the through hole 5472a (see FIG. 128). . Thus, the first start-up switch 5472 can be said to be downstream of the opening 5416 because the game ball A3 that has entered the opening 5416 can be detected in the inspection.

  When inspecting the fourth passage 5504, the game ball A4 is directly entered from the opening 5416 into the outlets 5443 and 5444. Thus, the game ball A4 is directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being distributed by the croon 5440. In the inspection, the flow of the game ball A4 entering the fourth passage 5504 is confirmed. Further, the operation of the outlet switch 5473 is confirmed by confirming whether or not the outlet switch 5473 has detected that the game ball A4 has passed through the through hole 5473a. In this manner, the outlet switch 5473 can be said to be downstream of the opening 5416 because it can detect the game ball A4 that has entered from the opening 5416 in the inspection.

  According to the game ball sorting apparatus 5400 according to the present embodiment, the game balls A3 and A4 can be entered from the opening 5416 into the croon 5440. Accordingly, the game balls A3 and A4 can be directly entered into the first passage 5501 without being distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420. For this reason, when the first passage 5501 is inspected, all the game balls A3 and A4 can enter the first passage 5501 (the second passage 5502 has a half probability by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420). Ca n’t be sorted). Thereby, the inspection of the first passage 5501 can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the game ball sorting device 5400 can directly enter the game ball A3 from the opening 5416 to the first start port 5442 of the cleon 5440. According to this, the game ball A3 can be directly entered into the third passage 5503 without being distributed by the croon 5440. As a result, when the third passage 5503 is inspected, all the game balls A3 can enter the third passage 5503 (there is no distribution to the fourth passage 5504 with a probability of two thirds by the clown 5440). Therefore, the third passage 5503 can be inspected efficiently.

  Here, if the game ball A is made to enter from the inlet 5411 and the third passage 5503 is to be inspected, the game ball A is distributed by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440 and is reduced to 1/6. The game ball A can enter the third passage 5503 only with a probability. On the other hand, the game ball sorting apparatus 5400 according to the present embodiment can enter the game ball A3 into the third passage 5503 with a probability of 100%. According to this, the inspection of the third passage 5503 having the lowest probability of distribution can be performed efficiently.

  In addition, the game ball sorting device 5400 can directly enter the game ball A4 from the opening 5416 to the out ports 5443 and 5444. According to this, the game ball A4 can be directly entered into the fourth passage 5504 without being distributed by the croon 5440. As a result, when the fourth passage 5504 is inspected, all the game balls A4 can enter the fourth passage 5504 (there is no distribution to the third passage 5503 with a one third probability by the clune 5440). Therefore, the fourth passage 5504 can be inspected efficiently.

  As described above, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment does not distribute to the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the cron 5440, but the first path 5501 (the third path 5503 and the fourth path 5504). Can be inspected. According to this, the inspection of the game ball sorting device 5400 can be performed efficiently. As for the inspection of the second passage 5502, for the convenience of entering the game ball A from the inflow port 5411, the game ball A is distributed by the rotary distribution mechanism 5420. Can enter the second passage 5502. For this reason, the inspection of the game ball sorting apparatus 5400 is not greatly delayed.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

  For example, the game ball distribution device 5400 according to the present embodiment includes two means for distributing the game balls A (including the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 and the cron 5440), but is not limited thereto. Instead, it is sufficient if it has at least one means for distributing the game balls A.

  In addition, the game ball sorting device 5400 does not necessarily have different configurations of the means for distributing the game balls A (the rotary distribution mechanism 5420 and the clune 5440), and the means for distributing the game balls A have the same configuration. May be. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 5400 may include two crons 5440 or two rotation distribution mechanisms 5420.

  Further, the rotation distribution mechanism 5420 distributes the game balls A to the first passage 5501 or the second passage 5502 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and there are three or more passages. The game balls A may be distributed to each other.

  In addition, the Kroon 5440 distributes the game balls A to the third passage 5503 or the fourth passage 5504 (two passages), but is not limited to this, and the game balls are arranged in three or more passages. A may be assigned.

  In addition, the base member 5410 may include an opening through which the game ball A can enter the lower right portion of the front side surface (a position overlapping the right guide path 5414 in front view). With such a configuration, when the second passage 5502 is inspected, the game ball A can directly enter the second passage 5502 from the opening. Accordingly, the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502 can be inspected efficiently. In this case, the opening formed at the lower right portion of the front side surface of the opening 5416 and the base member 5410 functions as an opening that can individually flow into the first passage 5501 and the second passage 5502. To do. In addition, the outlet switch 5471 functions as a second detection unit that can detect the game balls A distributed to the second passage 5502.

  In addition, the opening 5416 has a shape that is large enough to allow the game ball A to directly enter the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 of the clune 5440, but the shape of the opening 5416 is limited to this. Is not to be done. The opening 5416 may have any shape that allows the game ball A to enter the upper surface of the croon 5440. For example, the opening 5416 is small enough to prevent the game ball A from entering the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443 and 5444 directly. It may be a shape. Specifically, the shape of the opening 5416 may be a substantially circular shape in front view having an inner diameter substantially the same as the diameter of the game ball A.

  Further, the configurations of the out port switch 5471, the first start port switch 5472, and the out port switch 5473 are not limited to the present embodiment, and the game ball A can be detected by an appropriate means.

  As another embodiment of the game ball sorting device 5400, unlike the game ball sorting device 5400 described above (first embodiment), the positions of the first start port 5442 and the out ports 5443, 5444 are reversed. Good. By providing the inflow port of the first start port 5442 on the back side of the croon 5440, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an illegal act from the opening 5416. Further, a passage in which sensors are provided (more specifically, a passage for guiding a game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) is provided in the back of the cruiser 5640 (that is, disposed at a position far from the opening 5416), and the sensor A passage that is not provided with any kind (a passage that guides a game ball that has flowed into the inflow port) may be disposed at a position close to the opening 5416. For example, a first starting port switch is provided at the back inlet (out port 5443 according to the first embodiment), and an outlet switch is provided at the other inlet (similarly, the outlet 5444). A sensor is not provided at the inflow port on the front side (similarly, the first start port 5442). With such a configuration, even if the opening 5416 is provided, it is possible to suppress fraudulent operation with respect to the sensor.

  Further, based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the outlet switch 5473, the effect may be executed by the effect device (for example, the movable accessory unit 57), and the type of effect to be executed is determined. May be. The extraction timing of the production condition determination random number referred to when determining the production type may be used as the passage timing of the out port switch 5473, or the production is executed based on the number of passages of the out port switch 5473 in a certain period. May be. In addition, the display of a holding ball based on the detection of a game ball by the out-out switch 5471 and the display of variation of the decorative symbol may be performed. In this case, it is only an effect and is not related to the profit given to the player.

The main control circuit 100 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the specific game determination unit according to the present invention.
The sub control circuit 200 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control means according to the present invention.
Moreover, the path | route which guides the game ball which flowed into the out port 5443 which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the 1st path | route which concerns on this invention.
Further, the passage for guiding the game balls distributed to the out port 5444 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the second passage according to the present invention.
Further, the passage (third passage 5503) for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the first starting port 5442 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the third passage according to the present invention.
The out port 5443 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of an inflow port on the back side according to the present invention.
The out port 5444 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of another inflow port according to the present invention.
Moreover, the 1st starting port 5442 which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the inflow port of the near side which concerns on this invention.
Moreover, the 1st start-port switch which concerns on this embodiment is one Embodiment of the specific detection means which concerns on this invention.
The movable accessory unit 57 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect detection means according to the present invention.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a game ball sorting device 5600 according to another embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 135, a game ball sorting device 5600 according to another embodiment is greatly different from the game ball sorting device 5400 according to this embodiment in that it does not include a rotary sorting mechanism 5420. In FIG. 135, in order to make it easy to see the flow of the game ball A, the shape and direction of each member are schematically shown. A game ball sorting apparatus 5600 according to another embodiment includes an inflow port 5611, an introduction path 5612, a croon 5640, a first start port switch 5671, and a second start port switch 5672.

  The inflow port 5611 is configured to allow the game ball A to enter from the front.

  The introduction path 5612 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The introduction path 5612 has a front end connected to the inflow port 5611 and is configured to be able to guide the game ball A entered from the inflow port 5611 in the backward direction.

  The croon 5640 is connected to the rear end portion of the introduction path 5612. A game ball A guided through the introduction path 5612 enters the croon 5640. The cruiser 5640 includes a first start port 5541, a second start port 5642, an out port 5634, and the like.

  The first start port 5541 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in plan view, which is formed in the right front portion of the croon 5640. The first start port 5541 penetrates the Kleon 5640 in the vertical direction and has an inner diameter that allows the game ball A to enter.

  The second start port 5642 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in plan view, which is formed in the left part of the croon 5640. The second start port 5642 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first start port 5541.

  The out port 5543 is a hole having a substantially circular shape in a plan view, which is formed in the right rear portion of the croon 5640. The out port 5543 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the first start port 5641.

  The croon 5640 configured in this manner appropriately plays the game ball A guided from the introduction path 5612 with a protruding portion (not shown), thereby playing the game ball A in the first start port 5641, the second start port 5642, or the out. It can be distributed to any of the ports 5634 (three passages).

  The first start port switch 5671 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the first start port 5641. The first start port switch 5671 is disposed in a first passage 5701 described later with its plate surface directed in the left-right direction. The first start port switch 5671 is configured to be able to detect that the game ball A has entered in the same manner as the out port switch 5471 according to the present embodiment.

  The second start port switch 5672 is a sensor for detecting that the game ball A has entered the second start port 5642. The second start port switch 5672 is configured in the same manner as the first start port switch 5671 except that it is disposed in a second passage 5702 to be described later.

  The game ball sorting apparatus 5600 configured as described above includes a first passage 5701, a second passage 5702, and a third passage 5703 as passages for guiding the game balls A distributed by the croon 5640.

  The first passage 5701 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the first starting port 5641. First passage 5701 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the first passage 5701 is disposed below the first start port 5641 and is connected to the first start port 5641.

  The second passage 5702 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the second start port 5642. Second passage 5702 is formed to extend in the left-right direction. The right end of the second passage 5702 is disposed below the second start port 5642 and is connected to the second start port 5642.

  The third passage 5703 is a passage for guiding the game ball A that has entered the out port 5463. The third passage 5703 is formed to extend in the front-rear direction. The front end of the third passage 5703 is disposed below the out port 5634 and is connected to the out port 5463.

  The game ball sorting apparatus 5600 according to another embodiment has openings 5616 and 5617 as openings for allowing the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 during inspection. It has.

  The opening 5616 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the first passage 5701. The opening 5616 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. The opening 5616 is formed to have a size that allows the game ball A to enter. The opening 5616 is formed in the middle of the left and right of the first passage 5701. The opening 5616 is closed by appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

  The opening 5617 is a hole for allowing the game ball A to enter the second passage 5702. The opening 5617 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the opening 5616. The opening 5617 is formed in the left and right middle part of the second passage 5702. The opening 5617 is closed by appropriate closing means when the player plays a game.

  According to the game ball sorting apparatus 5600 according to another embodiment, the first passage 5701 can be inspected by directly entering the game ball A into the opening 5616 during the inspection. In addition, the second passage 5702 can be inspected by directly entering a game ball into the opening 5617 at the time of inspection. As described above, the first start port 5642 or the second start port 5642 is provided by providing the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 with the openings 5616 and 5617 capable of separately entering the game ball A. There is no need to aim the game ball A at the target. Therefore, the game ball A can easily enter the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702. According to this, the inspection of the first passage 5701 and the second passage 5702 can be efficiently performed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a displacement member that is displaceable between a first position where a game ball can easily pass through a passing area and a second position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass through Techniques for providing the are known. For example, as described in JP 2014-18304 A.

  In this technique, a slide-type attacker is provided as the displacement member. The slide-type attacker is configured to be movable so as to protrude from the game board to the player side. As a drive source for moving the slide-type attacker, a linear solenoid is adopted. Thus, the slide-type attacker can move so as to protrude from the game board to the player side using the driving force generated from the solenoid.

  In the conventional pachinko machine, the solenoid is disposed on the back side of the sliding attacker, and the moving direction of the plunger is the same as the moving direction of the sliding attacker. With such a configuration, a large space is required in the depth direction of the pachinko machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of making the depth direction compact.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention is:
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball rolls;
A prize winning opening 540 (passage area) provided in the game board 17 and through which a game ball can pass;
A shutter 610 (displacement member) displaceable between a first position where the game ball can easily pass and a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass with respect to the big prize opening 540 (passage area);
A prize winning solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guiding paths 430 and 530 for guiding a game ball to the big prize opening 540 (passing area);
With
The prize winning solenoid 620 (driving means) is configured so that the shutter 610 (displacement member) moves in the direction (left-right direction) different from the direction (front-rear direction) in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) moves from the first position to the second position. While generating the force which drives 610 (displacement member),
A link arm 630 (driving direction converting means) that converts the direction of the force generated from the big prize opening solenoid 620 (driving means) to a direction of moving from the first position to the second position;
The big prize opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is arranged on the front side from the gaming machine rear side end of the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

  With such a configuration, the driving direction of the big prize opening solenoid 620 is not the front-rear direction in which the shutter 610 slides, but the left and right directions, and the rear end part of the big prize opening solenoid 620 is from the rear end part of the link arm 630. Also, the depth of the attacker unit 500 can be reduced by disposing the front side. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The big prize opening solenoid 620 (driving means) is disposed below the link arm 630 (driving direction changing means).

  With such a configuration, the special winning opening solenoid 620 (driving means) and the link arm 630 (link mechanism) can have a two-story structure. That is, for example, the depth direction in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made compact compared to a case where the winning prize solenoid 620 and the link arm 630 are arranged side by side in the depth direction.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1
A first guiding path 531 (second guiding path) having a guiding portion 611 (bottom surface portion) and a front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion) of the shutter 610;
The shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced from the first position toward the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion) to be displaced to the second position,
When the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the second position, a guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) of the shutter 610 is formed,
When displaced to the second position, there is a gap through which the game ball cannot pass between the guide portion 611 (bottom surface portion) and the front side plate portion 520 (side wall portion).

  With such a configuration, the distance traveled when the shutter 610 is opened and closed can be shortened. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the depth direction can be made compact.

  Here, conventionally, a technique for allowing a large number of game balls to pass through a predetermined passing region in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine is publicly known. For example, it is as described in JP-A-2004-313481.

  In the technique described in Patent Document 1, a game ball container is provided that can store a plurality of game balls that have dropped on the game board and can release the storage. In such a configuration, when the storage is released in a state where a plurality of game balls are stored in the game ball container, the game ball container moves the stored plurality of game balls into a predetermined passing region by the operation. Can be passed through. That is, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, a large number of game balls can be passed through a predetermined passing area at a time.

  In the conventional pachinko machine described above, the game ball container is provided with a dedicated driving means and is operated by the driving means, which causes a high cost.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of passing a large number of game balls at a time with respect to a predetermined passing area without providing a dedicated driving means. With the goal.

A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention is:
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball rolls;
A prize winning opening 540 (passage area) provided in the game board 17 and through which a game ball can pass;
A shutter 610 that is displaceable between an open state (first mode) in which a game ball can easily pass through the big prize opening 540 (passage region) and a closed state (second mode) in which it is difficult to pass the game ball. (Displacement member),
A prize winning solenoid 620 (driving means) for driving the shutter 610 (displacement member);
Guide paths 430 and 530 capable of guiding a game ball to the big prize opening 540 (passing area);
With
The guide paths 430 and 530 are
A first guiding path 531 (first guiding path) having a deceleration rib 534 (decelerating means) capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball;
A second guiding path 532 (second guiding path) for guiding a game ball upstream of the first guiding path 531 (first guiding path);
A second guiding path 432 (third guiding path) for guiding a game ball downstream of the first guiding path 531 (first guiding path),
The second guiding path 432 (third guiding path) includes a game ball that has moved along the first guiding path 531 (first guiding path) and the second guiding path 432 (third guiding path). The game ball that has moved is arranged at a position where it can collide.

  With such a configuration, game balls guided through different guide paths can collide with each other in the first guide path 531. In this way, the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 can be further reduced, and as a result, it becomes easier to create a situation where a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531. . That is, a large number of game balls can be won (passed) at a time to the big prize opening 540 without providing a dedicated driving means.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1,
The second guide path 532 (second guide path) and the second guide path 432 (third guide path) are configured so that the second guide path 432 (third guide path) is the second guide path when the shutter 610 (displacement member) is in the first mode. The game balls that have moved along the guiding path 532 (second guiding path) and the second guiding path 432 (third guiding path) are arranged at positions where they can flow into the big prize opening 540 (passing area). Is.

  With such a configuration, the game balls can be guided to the first guide path 531 (and thus the third guide path 533) of the attacker unit 500 by two routes, so that a relatively large number of game balls can be won in a short period of time. The mouth 540 can be awarded. That is, round digestion in the jackpot game can be performed quickly.

  Here, in the past, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as a game ball having passed through a start area provided in a game area in which a launched game ball can roll, A display control means is provided for performing control to display the symbols as identification information in a variable manner on the display area, and to perform control for deriving and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed. The display mode is provided so as to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called “big hit”) advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a plurality of movable bodies are stacked and arranged on one surface side of a base member (see JP-A-2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (player side). Yes. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the plurality of movable bodies are concentrated on the one surface side of the base member, the center of gravity of the plurality of movable bodies as a whole is far from the base member. Therefore, a large moment of inertia is generated when the plurality of movable bodies are operated. As a result, the plurality of movable bodies swings and the movable bodies may come into contact with each other.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (game machine) according to the present embodiment includes a plate-like base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first one attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. ), A pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, a first movable body 1600, and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700. The movement control means 1800 includes a first movable body 1600 and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700. The movement control means 1800 allows the movement control means 1800 to provide an effect position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The first movable body 1600 is disposed closer to the player than the base member 1500 when the movement is controlled to the effect position, and a pair of left and right second movable bodies 170 are arranged. It is, if it is controlled to move the presentation position, is characterized in that it is disposed in the gaming machine interior side of the base member 1500.

By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the contact of movable bodies (the 1st movable body 1600 and the 2nd movable body 1700) can be suppressed.
That is, since the center of gravity of the entire second movable accessory unit 82 is located in or near the base member 1500, when the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) are operated. The generated moment of inertia can be reduced, and swinging (vibration, etc.) of the movable bodies (the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700) can be suppressed. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of contact between movable bodies (1st movable body 1600 and 2nd movable body 1700) can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first movable body 1600 is constituted by a single movable body and is arranged at the center of the base member 1500, and the pair of left and right second movable bodies 1700 includes a plurality of movable bodies (second movable bodies 1700). ) And are arranged as a pair of movable bodies at positions that are symmetrical.

By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of contact between movable bodies (the 1st movable body 1600 and the 2nd movable body 1700) can be suppressed more effectively.
That is, in the left-right direction, the center of gravity of the second movable accessory unit 82 as a whole is located at the center of the left and right of the second movable accessory unit 82 or a portion close thereto. 1600 and the second movable body 1700) can be suppressed more effectively. In addition, various effects can be performed by the first movable body 1600 disposed in the center and the second movable bodies 1700 disposed in a pair on the left and right sides while the center of gravity is positioned in the vicinity of the left and right centers.

  Further, here, for example, in a conventional pachinko machine, the display device is configured by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such as a game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area in which the launched game ball can roll. Display control means is provided for controlling the display as the identification information in a variable manner on the display area of the display, and for performing control for deriving and displaying the design in which the variable display is performed. When a specific display mode is established, a game is made to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called “big hit”) advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the pachinko machine, a technique for driving a movable body by a driving means has been proposed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-346103). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document can drive a sprocket (rotating body) by a driving motor (driving means) and pay out a game ball as the sprocket rotates.

  The drive motor has a plurality of fixed coils. The drive motor can rotate the sprocket by sequentially energizing a plurality of coils by passing current sequentially. Moreover, the drive motor can hold | maintain the state which stopped the sprocket by continuing sending an electric current only to the predetermined phase among several coils.

  However, the conventional pachinko machine needs to maintain the excitation of the coil of a predetermined phase in order to hold the sprocket in a stopped state, so that power is wasted and the life of the drive motor is shortened. It was disadvantageous.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a first movable body 1600 (movable body) that is controlled to move to an effect position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a movement control unit 1800 capable of controlling the movement of the movable body 1600. The movement control unit 1800 is a motor 1810 (driving unit) and a driving force generated by the motor 1810 is first movable. A driving force transmission mechanism 1820 that transmits to the body 1600. The driving force transmission mechanism 1820 converts the rotational force generated by the second transmission gear 1823 (rotary body) and the second transmission gear 1823 into a linear force. A conversion mechanism (arm 1824) for conversion and a reciprocating motion transmission means (Ar 1824), the first movable body 1600 is moved upward by rotating the second transmission gear 1823 in the clockwise direction (first direction) in the front view in the angle range Y (predetermined angle range). The movement is controlled, and the second transmission gear 1823 is controlled to move downward by rotating in the counterclockwise direction (second direction) when viewed from the front in the angle range Y, and the second transmission gear 1823 exceeds the angle range Y. When the second transmission gear 1823 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view beyond the angle range Y, the angle range X (specific angle range) is controlled by rotating in the downward direction by rotating in the clockwise direction in front view. Is provided with a first long hole 1824b (movement restricting means) that restricts rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from above.

By constituting in this way, waste of electric power can be suppressed.
That is, since the first movable body 1600 can be held at a predetermined position without supplying electric power to the motor 1810, waste of electric power can be suppressed. Further, this can prevent the life of the motor 1810 from being shortened.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first movable body 1600 is controlled to move to the standby position by the arm 1824 in a state where the rotation of the second transmission gear 1823 is restricted by the first long hole 1824b. It is what.

  With this configuration, the first movable body 1600 can be held at the standby position without wasting power.

  Further, here, for example, in a conventional pachinko machine, the display device is configured by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such as a game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area in which the launched game ball can roll. Display control means is provided for controlling the display as the identification information in a variable manner on the display area of the display, and for performing control for deriving and displaying the design in which the variable display is performed. When a specific display mode is established, a game is made to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called “big hit”) advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a plurality of movable bodies are stacked and arranged on one surface side of a base member (see JP-A-2015-202274). Specifically, the pachinko machine described in the document includes a movable effect device having a first movable body, a second movable body, and a third movable body arranged in front of the base member (player side). Yes. The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body are appropriately supported with respect to the base member.

  The first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body can move between an initial position (accommodating position) and a moving position (effect position), respectively. By moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the initial position to the moving position, the decoration portion can be greatly widened to perform an appropriate effect. Further, the decorative portion can be made difficult to be seen by the player by moving the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body from the moving position to the initial position.

  The conventional pachinko machine is based on the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body when the first movable body, the second movable body, and the third movable body of the movable effect device are in their initial positions. It arrange | positions in the state laminated | stacked on the one surface side of the member. For this reason, for example, when a strong impact is applied to the movable effect device when the movable effect device is transported, the movable bodies may come into contact with each other and be damaged.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment includes a plate-like base member 1500 to which a plurality of movable bodies can be attached, and a first movable body 1600 (first movable body) attached to one surface side of the base member 1500. A second movable body 1700 (second movable body) attached to the other surface side of the base member 1500, and a movement control means 1800 for controlling movement of the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700, The first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be moved and controlled by the movement control means 1800 to an effect position that is easily visible to the player and a standby position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The second movable body 1700 is housed on the other surface side when it is controlled to move to the standby position, and the second movable body 1700 is housed on the other surface side when it is controlled to move to the standby position. Is shall.

By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the contact of movable bodies can be suppressed.
That is, in a state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (in the standby position), a distance between the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 can be ensured. Therefore, the occurrence of contact between the movable bodies can be suppressed.

  In addition, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are arranged at positions where the base member 1500 cannot contact each other when the movement is controlled to the standby position.

By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the contact of movable bodies can be suppressed more effectively.
That is, the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are partitioned by the base member 1500 in a state where the first movable body 1600 and the second movable body 1700 are housed (in the standby position). The occurrence of contact between the movable bodies can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the past, for example, in a pachinko machine, when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as a game ball having passed through a start area provided in a game area in which a launched game ball can roll, A display control means is provided for performing control to display the symbols as identification information in a variable manner on the display area, and to perform control for deriving and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed. The display mode is provided so as to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called “big hit”) advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable cannot be easily disconnected from a connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide clamps the flat portion of the flat cable between other members. Accordingly, the wiring guide can restrict the movement and bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat portion, and thus the flat cable can be prevented from being easily detached from the connector.

  However, the conventional pachinko machine restricts the movement of the flat cable in a direction parallel to the flat portion (for example, the width direction of the flat cable), although it can restrict the flat cable from moving in a direction perpendicular to the flat portion. It is not a thing. Therefore, there is a possibility that the flat cable is inserted obliquely with respect to the connector. When the flat cable is inserted obliquely with respect to the connector, it is disadvantageous in that there is a possibility that a malfunction such as a short circuit or malfunction occurs.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a board 1720 on which an LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, a connector 1760 provided on the board 1720 and connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 connected to the connector 1760. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a guide portion 1714 that abuts at least one end portion in the width direction of the flat cable 1770 and defines a direction in which the flat cable 1770 is inserted into the connector 1760. A base member 1710 (direction defining means) is provided, and when the guide portion 1714 and the flat cable 1770 come into contact with each other, the flat cable 1770 is guided so that the direction in which the flat cable 1770 is inserted is the same as the insertion direction of the connector 1760. Cable 1770 is connector 1 And it is characterized in that a portion is inserted into the 60 provided to be visible from the outside.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects in the flat cable 1770.
That is, the guide portion 1714 guides the flat cable 1770 in the insertion direction of the connector 1760, so that the flat cable 1770 is inserted obliquely with respect to the connector 1760, or the connector moves along with the movement of the second movable body 1700. 1600 can be prevented from falling off. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions such as malfunction of the LED 1721.

  Further, the flat cable 1770 is provided with a plurality of power supply lines 1771 having different voltages.

By comprising in this way, generation | occurrence | production of the short circuit of the flat cable 1770 can be suppressed.
That is, by appropriately guiding the flat cable 1770, occurrence of a short circuit between the power supply lines 1771 having a voltage difference can be suppressed.

  Further, here, for example, in a conventional pachinko machine, the display device is configured by satisfying a predetermined variable display start condition such as a game ball passing through a start area provided in a game area in which the launched game ball can roll. Display control means is provided for controlling the display as the identification information in a variable manner on the display area of the display, and for performing control for deriving and displaying the design in which the variable display is performed. When a specific display mode is established, a game is made to shift to a big hit gaming state (so-called “big hit”) advantageous to the player.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine, a technique has been proposed in which a flat cable is sandwiched between wiring guides so that the flat cable cannot be easily disconnected from a connector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-104294). Specifically, the wiring guide clamps the flat portion of the flat cable between other members. Accordingly, the wiring guide can restrict the movement and bending of the flat cable in the direction perpendicular to the flat portion, and thus the flat cable can be prevented from being easily detached from the connector.

  However, in the conventional pachinko machine, the flat cable is sandwiched between the flat portions of the wiring guide. For this reason, when a certain amount of tension is applied to the flat cable, the wiring guide may move. That is, the conventional pachinko machine is disadvantageous in that the holding force of the flat cable by the wiring guide may not be sufficient.

  Accordingly, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes at least a part of the substrate 1720 on which the LED 1721 (electronic component) is mounted, the base member 1710 (first member) to which the substrate 1720 is fixed, and the substrate 1720. A pachinko gaming machine 1 that includes a cover member 1740 (second member) for covering, a connector 1760 provided on the substrate 1720, connected to the LED 1721, and a flat cable 1770 (wiring member) connected to the connector 1760. Thus, the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740 are in contact with each other at a predetermined abutting portion (the convex portion 1741a of the cover member 1740 and the concave portion 1713a of the base member 1710), and in a space formed by the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740. , At least a portion of substrate 1720 and connector 1760 The flat cable 1770 is arranged to follow the predetermined wiring path from the connector 1760 to the outside of the space, and is bent between the butted portions at a predetermined position of the wiring path. It is characterized by being fixed.

With such a configuration, the holding force of the flat cable 1770 can be improved.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be firmly held by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 in a bent state. Further, it is not necessary to separately prepare a member for holding the flat cable 1770, and the flat cable 1770 can be held using existing members (the base member 1710 and the cover member 1740).

Further, a concave portion 1713a is provided in the butt portion of the base member 1710,
A convex portion 1741a is provided at the butt portion of the cover member 1740,
The flat cable 1770 is characterized by being sandwiched and fixed between a concave portion 1713a and a convex portion 1741a.

With this configuration, the holding force of the flat cable 1770 can be improved with a simple configuration.
That is, the flat cable 1770 can be fixed in a bent state only by sandwiching the flat cable 1770 between the concave portion 1713a and the convex portion 1741a.

  Here, conventionally, a technology of a gaming machine provided with a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet that is provided with a plurality of symbols and can be attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

  The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel belt) having a mark formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction is determined with respect to the base member.

  However, since the reel sheet is configured to be positioned on the base member only at one end portion in the length direction, it is difficult to accurately position the reel sheet. For this reason, during the mounting of the reel sheet (or after the mounting), the position may be shifted and the mark may be realigned with the minute protrusion. At this time, since the reel sheet is peeled off from the base member and the position of the mark is adjusted again, the work of attaching the mark to the base member is complicated. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the efficiency of the work of attaching the reel sheet to the base member is poor.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and a problem to be solved is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the efficiency of the operation of attaching a reel sheet to a base member. .

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 including a rotatable circular base member 2421 and a reel sheet 2422 that is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 2421. The reel sheet 2422 is provided with a plurality of cutout portions 2422a to 2422c (position specifying means) that serve as a guide for the mounting position of the base member 2421, and a first cutout portion 2422a (first position specifying means). The distance L1a in one direction in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 from the second notch portion 2422b (second position specifying means) to the second notch portion 2422b and the one from the second notch portion 2422b to the third notch portion 2422c. The direction distance L2a is different.

  With this configuration, the reel sheet 2422 can be accurately positioned with respect to the base member 2421. Moreover, the pattern which the position of all the notch parts 2422a-2422c and all the projection parts 2421a-2421c matches can be made into one. As a result, the frequency of the operation of realigning the mounting position after mounting the reel sheet 2422 can be reduced, and the efficiency of the operation of mounting the reel sheet 2422 to the base member 2421 can be improved.

  The base member 2421 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c, and the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c are The plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c are configured to be engageable with each other, and the plurality of notches 2422a to 2422c and the plurality of protrusions 2421a to 2421c are engaged with each other so that the reel seat 2422 is engaged with the base member 2421. And a slip prevention means for preventing the reel sheet 2422 from slipping in the rotation direction of the base member 2421 when the base member 2421 is rotated.

With such a configuration, the reel sheet 2422 can be made to be a base member only by engaging the first notch portion 2422a to the third notch portion 2422c with the first protrusion portion 2421a to the third protrusion portion 2421c. 2421 can be easily positioned. Further, the reel sheet 2422 can be held at a specific position of the base member 2421 (can be hardly displaced after positioning).
Further, since the reel sheet 2422 can be reliably rotated integrally (preventing relative rotation) when the base member 2421 is rotated, the predetermined symbol C can be reliably displayed to the player.

  Here, conventionally, a technology of a gaming machine provided with a rendering device having a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet that is provided with a plurality of symbols and can be attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

  The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel belt) having a mark formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to a specific position of the base member so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because the reel sheet needs to be gradually attached to the base member after the mark position is aligned with the minute protrusion. Further, when the reel sheet and the base member are reused, it is necessary to remove the double-sided tape. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the relative rotation between the base member and the reel sheet is prevented using the double-sided tape (the reel sheet is prevented from being displaced from a specific position by the rotation of the base member). It is difficult to improve the detachability between the base member and the reel sheet for the sake of convenience.

  The present invention has been made in view of the situation as described above, and the problem to be solved is to prevent the reel sheet from being displaced from a specific position due to the rotation of the base member, and It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve detachability with a reel seat.

  A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a pachinko machine provided with a rendering device 3400 having a rotatable circular base member 3421 and a reel sheet 3422 that is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 3421. In the gaming machine 1, the base member 3421 is provided with three protrusions 3421a to 3421c (base member engaging portions) that can be engaged with the reel sheet 3422, and the reel sheet 3422 has the base Three notches 3422a to 3422c (reel sheet engaging portions) that can be engaged with the member 3421 are provided, and the three notches 3422a to 3422c and the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c are engaged with each other. The reel sheet 3422 is positioned at a specific position of the base member 3421, and the base member 342 There is for forming a displacement prevention means for preventing the displacement in the rotational direction of the base member 3421 of the reel seat 3422 when rotated.

  With this configuration, the reel sheet 3422 can be prevented from being displaced from a specific position by the rotation of the base member 3421. In addition, since the three notches 3422a to 3422c are engaged with the three protrusions 3421a to 3421c, attachment is performed without using double-sided tape at the same time as positioning, so that the base member 3421 and the reel sheet 3422 can be attached and detached. Can be improved.

  Further, at least a part of the base member 3421 is formed of a transparent member, and the reel sheet 3422 is accommodated so that the surface of the reel sheet 3422 is in contact with the inside of the base member 3421 and is applied to the reel sheet 3422. Further, at least a part of the pattern C is visible from the outside of the base member 3421 through the transparent member.

  With this configuration, the reel sheet 3422 can be pressure-bonded to the base member 3421 by a force that the reel sheet 3422 tends to open due to its elasticity (force to spread). Accordingly, the reel sheet 3422 can be easily fixed to the base member 3421 without using a double-sided tape.

  Here, conventionally, a technology of a gaming machine provided with a rotatable circular base member and a reel sheet that is provided with a plurality of symbols and can be attached to the base member is known. For example, as described in JP-A-2003-62151.

  The gaming machine (slot machine) includes a base member (framework) having minute protrusions formed on the outer periphery, and a reel sheet (reel belt) having a mark formed at one end in the length direction. The reel sheet is attached to the outer periphery of the base member using a double-sided tape. At this time, one end of the reel sheet in the length direction is aligned with the base member so that the mark is arranged on the side of the minute protrusion. Then, the reel sheet is gradually attached to the base member from one end in the length direction to the other end. As described above, the reel sheet is attached to the base member in a state where the position in the circumferential direction is determined with respect to the base member.

  However, it is difficult to efficiently attach the reel sheet to the base member because the reel sheet needs to be gradually attached to the base member after the mark position is aligned with the minute protrusion. Further, when the reel sheet and the base member are reused, it is necessary to remove the double-sided tape.

  Therefore, a configuration is conceivable in which the reel sheet is rolled and accommodated in the base member so that the reel sheet is attached to the base member without using double-sided tape, and the detachability of the base member and the reel sheet is improved. However, in such a configuration, the end of the reel sheet in the circumferential direction may be deformed so as to be warped inward in the radial direction of the reel sheet (see the reel sheet 4422 shown in FIG. 125). This creates a gap at the end of the reel sheet in the circumferential direction, which may impair the beauty.

  As described above, in the gaming machine, it is difficult to improve the detachability between the base member and the reel seat and to keep the aesthetic appearance.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and a problem to be solved is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the detachability between the base member and the reel sheet and maintaining the beauty. To do.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that includes a rotatable circular base member 4421 and a reel sheet 4422 that is provided with a plurality of symbols C and can be attached to the base member 4421. The base member 4421 is formed of a cylindrical transparent member having a hollow inner side, and the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated so that the end of the reel sheet 4422 partially overlaps the inner side of the base member 4421. In addition, on the inner side of the base member 4421, a pressing portion 4423 c (pressing member) that presses the end portion of the reel sheet 4422 is provided.

With this configuration, the reel sheet 4422 can be attached to the base member 4421 without using a double-sided tape. Accordingly, the detachability between the base member 4421 and the reel sheet 4422 can be improved.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the gap S (see FIG. 125B) from being formed by suppressing the deformation of the overlapping portion 4422d by the pressing portion 4423c. As a result, even when the light emitting unit 4430 (light emitting means) capable of irradiating light from the inside of the reel sheet 4422 with respect to the pattern C is provided, light leaks from the end in the circumferential direction of the reel sheet 4422. Can be prevented. For this reason, aesthetics can be maintained.

  In addition, the pressing portion 4423c is configured by a member (left side mounting member 4423) different from the base member 4421.

  With this configuration, the reel sheet 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421. For example, if a pressing portion is formed on the base member 4421, the left end portion of the reel sheet 4422 may be caught by the pressing portion when the reel sheet 4422 is accommodated. In contrast, when the pressing portion 4423c is formed on the left mounting member 4423 (a member fixed to the base member 4421 after receiving the reel sheet 4422) as in the present embodiment, the reel sheet 4422 is used as the base member. When being accommodated in 4421, the pressing portion 4423 c does not protrude from the base member 4421. Therefore, the pressing portion 4423c does not get in the way, and the reel sheet 4422 can be easily accommodated in the base member 4421.

  Here, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball sorting device provided with an inlet through which a gaming ball can flow is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-459.

  The game ball sorting device (sorting device) includes an upper stage crune, a lower stage croon, a lid, and the like. The upper cleon has three holes (drop area and two general areas) into which game balls can enter, and distributes the game balls into two passages. The upper cleon guides the game ball to the lower cleon in one of the two passages. The lower cleon has three holes (a fall region, a probability variation region, and a general region) into which game balls can enter, and distributes the game balls into three passages. The lid is formed so as to cover the upper and lower cruels. The lid is provided with an inflow port or the like through which a game ball can enter the upper cruel.

  In such a game ball sorting apparatus, the flow of the game ball and the operation of a sensor (such as a sensor that detects that a game ball has entered the probability variation area) are generally confirmed in an inspection at the time of manufacture. In the inspection, for example, a game ball is introduced from the inflow port of the lid, and the flow of the game ball guided to the upper crew is checked. At this time, the game balls are distributed to one of the two passages by the upper cleon. In addition, the game balls guided from the upper cleon to the lower cleon (distributed to the one passage) are distributed to one of the three passages by the lower cleon.

  However, in such an inspection, game balls may not be distributed to a passage to be inspected. In this case, the game ball is entered many times until the game ball is distributed to the passage to be inspected. In addition, if it is configured such that a game ball can easily enter a passage to be inspected (for example, a passage having a sensor), there is a possibility that fraud may be performed on the sensor by an unauthorized person. As described above, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to efficiently inspect the gaming ball sorting apparatus.

  The present invention has been made in view of the situation as described above, and the problem to be solved is to increase the inspection efficiency of the game ball sorting device and to prevent unauthorized sensors from being installed in the game hall. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be prevented from being performed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to another embodiment is
A game ball sorting device 5400 provided with an inflow port through which game balls can flow in, a detection means for detecting passage of the game balls distributed by the game ball sorting device 5400, and a first start of the detection means A main control circuit 100 (specific game determination means) capable of determining whether or not to shift to a specific game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the mouth switch (specific detection means); A gaming machine equipped with
The game ball sorting device 5400 has an inflow port on the back side (similarly) that can distribute the inflowing game ball to the first passage (path for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the out port 5443 according to the first embodiment). , Out port 5443) (first inflow port) and the inflowing game balls are transferred to a second path different from the inflow port on the back side (also a path for guiding the game balls distributed to the out port 5444). Another inflow port that can be separated (similarly, out port 5444) (second inflow port) and the inflow game balls are different from the inflow port on the back side and the inflow port on the other back side. An inflow port (also the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) on the near side that can be distributed to the third path (also a path that guides the game ball that has flowed into the first start port 5442). Including
The first start port switch (specific detection means) is provided in the first passage (similarly, a passage for guiding a game ball flowing into the out port 5443),
The second passage (similarly, a passage that guides the game balls distributed to the out port 5444) is provided with an out port switch (a detection unit different from the specific detection unit),
The detection means is not provided in the third passage (similarly, a passage for guiding the game ball flowing into the first start port 5442),
From the outside of the game ball sorting apparatus 5400, the back-side inlet (also the out-port 5443) (first inlet) and the other back-side inlet (also the out-port 5444) (second And an opening 5416 through which a game ball can flow into the inlet on the near side (also the first starting port 5442) (third inlet),
The rear inlet (also the outlet 5443) (first inlet) and the other inlet (also the outlet 5444) (second inlet) are the front inlet. It is provided at a position farther from the opening 5416 than the inlet (similarly, the first start port 5442) (third inlet).

With such a configuration, in the game ball sorting device 5400 according to another embodiment, the inspection efficiency of the game ball sorting device 5400 is increased, and the sensor is cheated after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall. Can be prevented.
More specifically, since the game ball can enter the croon 5440 without being distributed by the rotation distribution mechanism 5420, the first passage 5501 (specifically, the first passage (first implementation) A path for guiding game balls flowing into the out-port 5443 according to the embodiment), a second path (also a path for guiding game balls distributed to the out-port 5444), and a third path (also the first start). It is possible to perform an inspection of the passage)) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the mouth 5442. Thereby, for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured, the gaming ball sorting device 5400 can be inspected efficiently.
Further, in the case where the opening 5416 is provided, a fraudulent person can enter a game ball from the opening 5416 using illegal means and obtain a winning ball or an advantageous game state by causing the sensor to detect it. There is a risk of some work on the sensor itself. However, as described above, the inflow port on the near side (also the first start port 5442) (third inflow port) that does not have the sensor is connected to the rear inflow port (also similar to the out port 5443) (first output) that has the sensor. 1 inflow) and another back-side inlet (similarly, out-out port 5444) (second inflow port) closer to the opening 5416, the fraudulent has the inflow port. It is difficult to cheat the sensor. As described above, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed on the sensor by an unauthorized person.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is
Movable accessory unit 57 (direction device);
A sub-control circuit 200 (production control means) capable of controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (production device),
In the second passage (similarly, a passage for guiding game balls distributed to the out port 5444), an out port switch 5473 (production detecting means) is provided,
The sub control circuit 200 (production control means) can control the movable accessory unit 57 (production apparatus) based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the outlet switch 5473 (production detection means). Is.

  With such a configuration, even if the fraudulent person tries to flow the game ball into the inflow port (also the out port 5443) (the first inflow port) having the sensor, the player's profit (specifically, Is the inflow for the production that is unrelated to the prize ball and the advantageous gaming state) (also the out-port 5444) (second inflow). It is possible to prevent fraud.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 17 Game board 20 Game area 430 Guide way 432 2nd guide way 520 Front side board part 530 Guide way 532 2nd guide way 531 1st guide way 540 Big prize opening 610 Shutter 611 Guide part 620 Big prize opening solenoid 630 Link arm

Claims (2)

A game board having a game area in which a game ball rolls;
A passing area provided in the game board and through which a game ball can pass;
A displacement member that is displaceable into a first mode in which a game ball is easy to pass and a second mode in which a game ball is difficult to pass,
Drive means for driving the displacement member;
A guideway capable of guiding a game ball to the passing area;
With
The taxiway is
A first guiding path having a speed reducing means capable of decelerating the moving speed of the game ball;
A second guiding path for guiding a game ball upstream of the first guiding path;
A third guiding path for guiding a game ball downstream of the first guiding path,
The third taxiway is disposed at a position where a game ball that has moved along the first taxiway and a game ball that has moved along the third taxiway can collide with each other. A gaming machine.   When the displacement member is in the first mode, the second guiding path and the third guiding path are such that the game ball that has moved along the second guiding path and the third guiding path is The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at a position where it can flow into the passage area.

Images